Operation Manual
The Steinberg Documentation Team: Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte Translation: Ability InterBusiness Solutions (AIBS), Moon Chen, Jérémie Dal Santo, Rosa Freitag, Josep Llodra Grimalt, Vadim Kupriianov, Filippo Manfredi, Roland Münchow, Boris Rogowski, Sergey Tamarovsky This document provides improved access for people who are blind or have low vision.
Table of Contents 8 New features 11 11 11 12 14 Introduction Platform-independent documentation Usage of musical terms Conventions How you can reach us 15 15 Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts 23 23 36 45 47 User interface Project window Workspace setup Preferences dialog Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 53 53 54 56 57 58 59 76 78 Project and file handling Hub Starting new projects Opening projects/files Projects from different versions of Dorico Missing Fonts di
Table of Contents 617 618 618 619 551 Articulations in playback 553 553 553 555 556 Bars Bar length Deleting bars/beats Splits in bars Combining bars 558 558 560 560 Barlines Types of barlines Deleting barlines Barlines across staff groups 563 563 564 565 567 570 572 573 Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multibar rests Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers Changing the bar number paragraph style used in layouts Positions of b
Table of Contents 680 680 Front matter Project information used in default master pages 682 683 684 684 684 685 686 686 Grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes Showing grace notes before/after barlines Grace note size Grace note slashes Grace note stems Grace note beams Grace notes in playback 687 687 689 Holds and pauses Types of holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses 693 693 694 695 696 696 697 698 699 700 Key signatures Key signature arrangements Types of key signatures
Table of Contents 808 810 812 812 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Text pedal line signs Pedal lines in playback Pedal lines imported from MusicXML files 813 814 815 815 817 818 821 Playing techniques Adding text to playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques Positions of playing techniques Lengthening/Shortening playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Groups of playing techniques 823 825 826 831 833 834 835 835 Lines Line components Positions of lines Len
Table of Contents 940 941 943 944 946 947 947 Ties vs.
New features New Features in Version 3.5.10 Tempo track import ● When importing tempo tracks, you can now choose to import into a new flow instead of an existing flow. See Importing tempo tracks. Figured bass improvements ● The figured bass popover now accepts and interprets more entries, including double and triple accidentals and the overall and suspension durations of figured bass figures. See Figured bass popover.
New features Manual staff visibility ● You can now change staff visibility manually from system/frame breaks, including showing individual empty staves or hiding individual non-empty staves. See Hiding/Showing staves from system/frame breaks. Blank staves ● You can now automatically fill pages after the final flow in layouts with blank staves, including filling the width of the final system with blank staves when the final system is not fully horizontally justified.
New features Slur improvements ● You can now change the placement of individual articulations of duration relative to slur endpoints. See Changing the placement of articulations relative to slurs. ● The default appearance, position, and shape of slurs in various contexts has been improved, such as when they cross system/frame breaks or join notes with different stem directions. See Slurs over system and frame breaks, Slur endpoint positions, and Slur collision avoidance.
Introduction Thank you very much for purchasing Dorico Elements. We are delighted that you have chosen Steinberg's scoring application and hope that you will enjoy using it for years to come. Dorico is a next-generation application for producing beautiful sheet music, whether you are a composer, arranger, music engraver, publisher, instrumentalist, teacher, or student. Whether you want to print your music or share it in a digital format, Dorico is the most sophisticated program available.
Introduction Conventions American name British name Half note Minim Quarter note Crotchet Eighth note Quaver Sixteenth note Semiquaver Thirty-second note Demisemiquaver Sixty-fourth note Hemidemisemiquaver Hundred twenty-eighth note Semihemidemisemiquaver Two hundred fifty-sixth note Demisemihemidemisemiquaver Half-step Semitone Whole step Whole tone Staff Stave Bar/Measure Bar NOTE This documentation only uses “bar”.
Introduction Conventions Tip Adds further information or useful suggestions. Example Provides you with an example. Result Shows the result of the procedure. After Completing This Task Informs you about actions or tasks that you can perform after completing the procedure. Related Links Lists related topics that you can find in this documentation. Markup Elements of the user interface are highlighted throughout the documentation.
Introduction How you can reach us You can also do one of the following: ● Choose Help > Key Commands to open the Dorico Key Commands window, which provides an overview of all available key commands. ● Search for key commands of specific functions or menu items in the Preferences dialog. In this dialog, you can also assign new key commands or change default key commands.
Dorico concepts Dorico is based on a number of key concepts that come from its design philosophy. We recommend familiarizing yourself with these concepts, as this will greatly enhance your ability to work efficiently with Dorico and to navigate more easily through this documentation. Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Deep design considerations are required to create a notation software like Dorico, which might be of particular interest to users familiar with scoring applications.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts smaller number of staves, a full score with each player's music on separate staves, a custom score layout containing just the piano and vocal staves for choral rehearsals, and an instrumental part for each player that only contains the music belonging to them. Projects in Dorico A project is an individual file that you create within Dorico Elements.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts such as PDF or PNG, and the information you want to include in their exported file names.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts You can also group players together, for example, to separate off-stage players from on-stage players in a large-scale work. Grouping players together means they are positioned together in the score, numbered independently of players outside the group, and are bracketed together according to the ensemble type set for each layout. Players can be assigned to any combination of layouts and flows.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts One of the key benefits of popovers is that you can use them as you input notes: once you reach the position where you want to input a new time signature, for example, you can open the time signatures popover using its key command, input the time signature you want, and then continue inputting notes. Although specific entries are required for many notations, the correct entries for different notations are consistently and logically structured.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts changes the context, such as a quarter note tied to an eighth note becoming a dotted quarter note when it is followed by an eighth note rather than a rest. TIP In Write mode, selecting any part of a tie chain selects the whole tie chain because it is a single note. However, you can still input notations, such as dynamics, in the middle of tie chains by activating the caret and moving it to the required rhythmic position within the tie chain.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts Time signatures on page 949 Inputting notes in Insert mode on page 178 Notes on page 718 Caret on page 157 Rhythmic grid on page 155 Annotations on page 537 Layouts in Dorico Layouts combine musical content, as represented by flows and players, with rules for page formatting and music engraving, and allow you to produce paginated music notation that can be printed or exported in various formats.
Dorico concepts Design philosophy and higher-level concepts If you want to change the information shown at the tops of pages, that is, the title and running header text that you cannot select, we recommend that you do so in the Project Info dialog to avoid master page overrides. The big title at the top of the first page is the project title, and the running header on subsequent pages uses the flow title for the top flow on that page.
User interface The user interface of Dorico Elements is designed to be as unobtrusive as possible while keeping all of the important tools at your fingertips. This chapter introduces you to key aspects of the user interface. Project window Dorico Elements’s main project window allows you to access all the options and tools you need to work on a project. You can open multiple project windows for the same project or for different projects.
User interface Project window In Play mode, this area contains an event display that shows the effects of manipulating the playback of your score. In Print mode, the print preview area shows a preview of how your project will appear when printed onto paper or exported into a graphics file format. 4 Panel Provides notes and notations that you need to create and edit your music. Different panels contain different items and functions according to the mode.
User interface Project window Shows which project is activated for playback when you have multiple projects open. RELATED LINKS Modes in Dorico on page 16 Mini transport on page 25 Videos on page 136 Mixer on page 469 Workspace options The workspace options in the middle of the toolbar provide options that allow you to select different layouts and to change the working environment. Layout selector Allows you to select other layouts to show in the current tab.
User interface Project window Time display showing bars and beats Time display showing elapsed time Time display showing the timecode You can change the content shown in the time display by clicking it. Fixed Tempo Mode Displays the tempo used for both playback and recording. The value changes according to the current position of the playhead and its appearance changes according to its current mode. You can change the tempo mode by clicking the beat unit.
User interface Project window Playing back music on page 458 Moving the playhead on page 457 Changing the tempo mode on page 463 Changing the content shown in the transport display on page 473 MIDI recording on page 204 Mixer on page 469 Tab bar The tab bar in Dorico Elements allows you to display different layouts within the same project window. It is located between the toolbar and the music area. TIP If you cannot see the tab bar, click Show Tabs in the toolbar.
User interface Project window Project start area The project start area is displayed in the middle of the project window in Setup mode and Write mode when you set up a new empty project. When you add at least one player, the view changes into the music area. Project start area The project start area shows cards that allow you to add your first players. To add players, click one of the cards: Add Solo Player Adds an individual player to whom you can assign one or more instruments.
User interface Project window Music area showing a new choir piece in page view The music area displays layouts in either galley view or page view. The tab bar above the music area allows you to open multiple layouts in the project simultaneously and switch between them. The scroll bars to the right and to the bottom of the music area allow you to scroll within the layout. You can also use the layout selector in the toolbar to show other layouts in the music area.
User interface Project window Print preview area The print preview area is the central part of the project window in Print mode that shows a preview of what will be printed or exported as a graphic. Print preview area displaying a score set to print 2-up In the print preview area, you can scroll through the pages that are shown, but you cannot edit your layouts. If you want to make changes, you must switch to Setup or Write mode.
User interface Project window Panels The panels in the project window provide the notes, notations, and functions that you need to set up, write, edit, and format your music. They are located on the left, right, and bottom of the project window. Panels in Write mode 1 Left panel. In Write mode, this is the Notes panel. 2 Right panel. In Write mode, this is the Notations panel. 3 Bottom panel. In Write mode, this is the Properties panel.
User interface Project window RELATED LINKS Modes in Dorico on page 16 Hiding/Showing panels on page 37 Project window in Setup mode on page 80 Project window in Write mode on page 143 Project window in Play mode on page 412 Project window in Print mode on page 518 Toolboxes Toolboxes are available in Write mode and Play mode. They contain different tools and options according to the current mode, but in general they allow you to input and modify notes and notation items.
User interface Project window ● 3 Summary of the selection, for example, the pitch and voice of a single selected note or the implied chord of multiple selected notes Disclosure arrow Allows you to show/hide the bottom panel in Setup mode and Write mode. 4 Selection tools Allow you to switch between using the Marquee Tool and the Hand Tool in Write mode. 5 View type selector Allows you to select one of the provided view types for the music area in Setup and Write mode.
User interface Project window ● You can change the default selection tool for all future projects on the Note Input and Editing page in Preferences. RELATED LINKS Selecting multiple items using marquee selections on page 335 Dragging pages in the music area on page 348 Preferences dialog on page 45 View types In Dorico Elements there are different ways to view your layouts. Dorico Elements saves your chosen view type for each layout, so you only need to set it once.
User interface Project window Page arrangements for page view You can change the way pages are arranged for display in the music area. Spreads Horizontally Displays pages in pairs as two-page spreads, with each pair laid out from left to right in a row. Spreads Vertically Displays pages in pairs as two-page spreads, with each pair laid out from top to bottom in a column. Single Pages Horizontally Displays individual pages laid out from left to right.
User interface Workspace setup Disclosure arrow for the bottom panel Disclosure arrows for both the player card and the instrument within it Disclosure arrows for sections in the Tempo panel RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing panels on page 37 Players panel on page 81 Instruments on page 100 Workspace setup Dorico Elements enables you to set up your workspace according to your working style.
User interface Workspace setup RESULT The selected layout is opened in the music area. It replaces the layout previously open in the tab. RELATED LINKS Layouts on page 124 Implicit vs. explicit rests on page 880 Hiding/Showing panels You can hide/show individual or multiple panels. This is useful if you want to see more of the music area, for example. PROCEDURE ● Hide individual panels or all panels in the following ways: ● To hide/show the left panel: Press Ctrl/Cmd-7 .
User interface Workspace setup EXAMPLE Appearance when panels are shown Appearance when all panels were previously shown but are now all hidden Opening new tabs You can open multiple tabs in the same project window, which you can use to display multiple layouts or different views of the same layout. For example, you can show your full score layout in page view in one tab and in galley view in another tab.
User interface Workspace setup 2. Select a layout to open in the new tab in any of the following ways: ● Click one of the icons. ● Select a layout from the list at the bottom. ● Select a layout from the layout selector in the toolbar. RESULT The layout that you choose opens in the active tab. TIP You can also switch between different layouts within the same tab.
User interface Workspace setup ● Press Ctrl-Tab to cycle through all open tabs. ● Press Ctrl-Shift-Tab to cycle through all open tabs in reverse order. ● Click the tab to which you want to switch. Changing the order of tabs You can move tabs to a different position on the tab bar. PROCEDURE ● Click and drag a tab to the new position. The other tabs move to show where the dragged tab will be positioned.
User interface Workspace setup Moving tabs to other windows You can move tabs to another open window of the same project to show the corresponding layouts in a new window. NOTE ● The layouts must belong to the same project. If you attempt to move a tab to a window of a different project, a new window is created for the project to which the layout belongs. ● You can only move tabs to other windows if you have opened at least two tabs.
User interface Workspace setup Within Dorico Elements, you can also hide/show the panels on the right, left, and at the bottom of the window. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Full Screen. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To return to the default view, choose View > Full Screen again.
User interface Workspace setup ● You can change the default view type used for all projects in the View section of the General page in Preferences.
User interface Workspace setup Changing the page color You can change the color of pages in each of the different layout types, for example, to help you identify whether you are in a part layout or full score layout, or to make reading the music easier or more comfortable. By default, full score and custom score layouts have white pages, while part layouts have cream pages. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
User interface Preferences dialog ● If you chose Gradient and want to use a custom selection of colors, either click each color preview and select a color in the Select Color (Windows)/Colors (macOS) dialog or enter color codes into the value fields. ● If you chose Single Color, either click the Stop 1 color preview and select a color in the Select Color (Windows)/Colors (macOS) dialog or enter a color code into the value field.
User interface Preferences dialog The Preferences dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog ● Search pages field: Allows you to enter the term you want to search for. You can set the focus to the Search pages field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-F . ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page. You can also navigate to the previous match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G . ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G .
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog Allows you to search for menu items and functions to view, change, or add key commands. Because there are multiple levels of disclosure arrows before you reach many menu items and functions, this is often the quickest way to find what you are looking for. 2 Menu items and functions Displays the menu items and functions that can be assigned key commands. The list can be filtered using the Search field.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog The interactive key commands map as it appears when US English is selected The Dorico Key Commands map opens in a web browser. It allows you to do any of the following: ● To see the available key commands, select a context. The context of a key command is the mode in which it can be used. Key commands that have a global context work in all modes.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog For particularly long names, you can hover over them to see a tool tip. RESULT If the function has a key command, it is shown in the list of assigned key commands. TIP You can also search for functions in the interactive key commands map.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 4. Click MIDI Learn . 5. Press the key or button on your MIDI keyboard that you want to assign to the selected parameter. 6. Click Add MIDI Command. 7. Click Apply, then Close. Changing the keyboard layout You can change the keyboard layout in Dorico Elements to that of another language. This allows you to use the predefined key commands for the selected language. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2.
User interface Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT All custom key commands are deleted and the default key commands are reinstated. 52 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Project and file handling In addition to opening and importing/exporting projects and other file formats, project and file handling also includes auto-save and project backups. RELATED LINKS Starting new projects on page 54 File import and export on page 59 Auto-save on page 76 Project backups on page 78 Hub When you start Dorico Elements, the Hub opens. The Hub keeps you up-to-date with the latest Dorico information and tutorials, and assists you with organizing your projects.
Project and file handling Starting new projects Displays either recent projects or project templates, depending on your selection on the left of the dialog. 5 Open Other Allows you to search for and open any other project file in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 6 New from Template (project template selected) Creates a new project using the selected project template. This option is only available if you have selected a project template.
Project and file handling Starting new projects Starting new projects from project templates Dorico Elements provides multiple project templates that you can use to start a new project, for example, multiple types of orchestras and vocal ensembles. NOTE In Dorico Elements, the maximum number of players you can have in a single project is 12, so only templates containing 12 or fewer players are available. PROCEDURE 1.
Project and file handling Opening projects/files Band Large ensembles containing primarily wind instruments, including woodwind and brass instruments, and optionally percussion and other instruments, such as strings and guitars. Jazz Popular ensembles commonly used to perform jazz, such as big band or jazz trio. Chamber Typically small ensembles containing only a few players, such as string quartet.
Project and file handling Projects from different versions of Dorico RELATED LINKS Hub on page 53 Importing MusicXML files on page 63 Importing MIDI on page 65 Opening recent projects from the Hub You can open a project on which you have recently worked from the Steinberg Hub. PROCEDURE 1. In the Hub, click Recent Projects. 2. In the list, select a recent project in any the following ways: ● Press Up Arrow / Down Arrow to navigate to the project file name, then press Return to open it.
Project and file handling Missing Fonts dialog Missing Fonts dialog The Missing Fonts dialog appears when you open a project that contains a font that you do not have installed on your computer. It allows you to select replacement fonts that are installed on your computer as substitutes. The Missing Fonts dialog displays a table with multiple columns that identify the specific font families and styles that are missing for font, character, and paragraph styles and text objects.
Project and file handling File import and export Contains a list of all the available fonts installed on your computer. You can access the menu in the Replacement Family and Replacement Style columns by double-clicking any entry. TIP You can choose whether or not the Missing Fonts dialog appears when you open a project containing fonts not installed on your computer on the General page in Preferences.
Project and file handling File import and export containing a solo piano into a project containing a piano and viola, the imported flow is added to the existing piano player. NOTE ● Players are not automatically added to flows that you imported into the project. ● You can also open flows directly if you want them to be separate projects rather than new flows in existing projects.
Project and file handling File import and export Exporting flows You can export individual flows from projects, for example, to save small excerpts of large projects separately. NOTE These steps export flows as separate Dorico projects. If you want to export flows as other file formats, such as MusicXML or MP3, there are different methods. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > Flows to open the Export Flows dialog. 2. Activate/Deactivate Export each selected flow as a separate file. 3.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Flows dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 Export each selected flow as a separate file Allows you to export each flow as a separate file instead of all the selected flows as a single file. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated.
Project and file handling File import and export Importing MusicXML files You can import MusicXML files into existing Dorico Elements projects as separate flows, for example, to continue work on a piece started in a different notation software. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Import > MusicXML to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 2. Locate and select the MusicXML files you want to import. 3. Click Open to open the Flow Import Options dialog for the first selected MusicXML file. 4.
Project and file handling File import and export ● Export compressed XML (.mxl) ● Export uncompressed XML (.xml) 3. In the Select flows to export list, activate the checkbox for each flow you want to export. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 4. Activate/Deactivate Export layouts as separate files. 5. Optional: If you activated Export layouts as separate files, activate the checkbox for each layout you want to export in the Select layouts to export list.
Project and file handling File import and export Allows you to choose the MusicXML file format you want to export. Compressed MusicXML files contain the same information as uncompressed MusicXML files but have a smaller file size. 2 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 3 Export layouts as separate files Allows you to export each layout in the project as a separate file instead of as a single file.
Project and file handling File import and export 10. Optional: If you selected multiple MIDI files, repeat steps 4 to 9 for each file. The MIDI Import Options and Flow Import Options dialogs reopen automatically for each file. RESULT The selected MIDI files are imported into the project as new flows. Dorico Elements uses an algorithm on imported MIDI notes to produce the correct enharmonic spelling for the imported notes.
Project and file handling File import and export The MIDI Import Options dialog contains the following sections: 1 Instrument handling The options in this section determine how Dorico Elements chooses and names instruments based on the imported MIDI file. The Quantize Options button opens the MIDI Quantize Options dialog, which allows you to customize the quantization settings.
Project and file handling File import and export MIDI Quantize Options dialog The MIDI Quantize Options dialog allows you to customize the quantization settings you want to apply to imported MIDI files and notes input by recording with a MIDI device. You can open the MIDI Quantize Options dialog in any of the following ways: ● Click Quantize Options in the MIDI Import Options dialog. ● Click Quantization Options in the Recording subsection of the Play page in Preferences.
Project and file handling File import and export Exporting MIDI You can export flows as separate MIDI files, for example, if you want to edit the audio in further detail in a DAW. MIDI files exported from Dorico Elements contain any markers in the project by default. PREREQUISITE You have positioned a layout containing the players whose MIDI you want to export at the top of the Layouts panel in Setup mode. PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > MIDI to open the Export MIDI dialog. 2.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export MIDI dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export 4. In the Import into flow list, select the flow into which you want to import the tempo track. 5. In the Import and replace section, activate the checkbox for each tempo track aspect you want to include. 6. Optional: If you activated the checkbox for Markers as, choose one of the following options: ● Markers ● System Text 7. Optional: If you chose System Text for Markers as, activate/deactivate Show border around system text markers. 8.
Project and file handling File import and export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. The currently selected flow is highlighted. NOTE You can only import tempo tracks into a single flow at a time. 2 Import and replace Allows you to control which tempo track aspects you want to include in your import and apply to the selected flow. ● Timecode display offset sets the initial timecode position at the start of the flow.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Tempo Track dialog comprises the following: 1 Select flows to export Contains a list of all the flows in the project. Flows are included in the export when their checkbox is activated. 2 Selection options Allow you to select/deselect all the flows in the project. For example, you can deselect all flows and then activate the checkbox of a single flow you want to export.
Project and file handling File import and export PROCEDURE 1. Choose File > Export > Audio to open the Export Audio dialog. 2. Choose one of the following file format options: ● Export compressed mp3 (.mp3) ● Export uncompressed WAV (.wav) 3. Activate/Deactivate Export each selected flow as a separate file. 4. In the Select flows to export list, activate the checkbox for each flow you want to export as audio. You can also click Select All or Select None at the bottom of the list. 5.
Project and file handling File import and export The Export Audio dialog contains the following options and lists: 1 File format options Allows you to choose the audio file format you want to export. Compressed MP3 files are smaller than WAV files but this corresponds to a reduced audio quality. 2 Export each selected flow as a separate file Allows you to export each flow in the project as a separate audio file instead of as a single audio file.
Project and file handling Auto-save Auto-save The auto-save function stores a version of the currently active project at regular intervals, including new projects you have not explicitly saved yet. This reduces the chances of losing significant amounts of work if you accidentally close a project without saving or in the unlikely event that Dorico Elements or your computer crashes. Dorico Elements saves auto-saved projects in an AutoSave folder inside the application data folder for your user account.
Project and file handling Auto-save Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog allows you to recover individual auto-saved projects, for example, after you accidentally closed a project without saving or if Dorico Elements or your computer crashed. The Recover Auto-saved Projects dialog contains the following: Auto-saved projects list Contains all the auto-saved projects that are available for recovery.
Project and file handling Project backups AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can save auto-saved projects permanently in any folder location and with new file names if required. Changing the auto-save frequency You can change how frequently Dorico Elements auto-saves projects. By default, the auto-save interval is five minutes for the currently active project. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
Project and file handling Project backups Changing the backup location You can change the folder that Dorico Elements uses to store project backups. By default, Dorico Elements uses the Backup Projects folder inside your Dorico Projects folder, whose default location is in the Documents folder for your user account. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
Setup mode Setup mode allows you to set up the fundamental elements of the project: instruments and the players that hold them, flows, layouts, and videos. You can also determine how they interact with each other, for example, by changing the players assigned to layouts. You can view music in the music area and switch between viewing other tabs and layouts, but you cannot select or interact with anything in the music area in Setup mode.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode 2 Layouts Lists the layouts in your project. A single full score layout and a part layout for each player are created automatically, but you can create and delete layouts as required. By default, layouts contain all flows and full score layouts contain all players. 3 Flows Shows the flows in your project, ordered left to right. By default, flows contain all players and are assigned to all layouts.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode In the Players panel, each player is shown as a card that contains the instruments held by that player. Each player card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the player card. 2 Player type Shows the type of player from the following options: 3 ● Solo player ● Section player Player name Shows the name of the player. Dorico Elements automatically adds the names of the assigned instruments to the player name.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode further options that allow you to, for example, change the instrument names or move the instrument to another player. The action bar at the bottom of the panel contains the following options: Add Solo Player Adds an individual player to your project. Dorico Elements also automatically adds a part layout for the player to the Layouts panel. Add Section Player Adds a player to your project that represents multiple players who all play the same instrument.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode ● Add a new player or ensemble. Instrument picker when adding an instrument The instrument picker contains the following sections and options: 1 Search field Allows you to enter the instrument/ensemble you are searching for directly. You can enter only part of the instrument/ensemble name, such as cello for Violoncello. 2 Instrument family column Contains instrument families to help you focus your instrument/ensemble search.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode You can cycle forwards through the instrument picker by pressing Tab , which navigates in the following order: Search field, Instrument, Instrument type, Instrument family. You can also cycle backwards by pressing Shift-Tab , which navigates in the opposite direction. An enclosure line shows which instrument family, instrument, or ensemble is selected when using the keyboard to navigate.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout. Dorico Elements automatically adds default names depending on the name of the instrument that is assigned to a player and on the type of layout that is added.
Setup mode Project window in Setup mode Sort Layouts Sorts all layouts in the Layouts panel according to their type in the following order: full score layouts, instrumental part layouts, custom score layouts. It does not sort part layouts according to orchestral order. Layout Options Opens the Layout Options dialog for one or multiple selected layouts. Delete Layout Deletes selected layouts from the project.
Setup mode Project Info dialog 1 Flow name Shows the name of the flow. If you create multiple flows without renaming them, each flow name shows a number that increments with each new flow that you create. The number also indicates the position of the flow in a layout. 2 Film reel icon Indicates the flow has an attached video. 3 Flow timecode Shows the start timecode for the flow. 4 Flow number Shows the number of the flow. The number increments with each new flow that you create.
Setup mode Project Info dialog The Project Info dialog comprises the following: 1 Flows list Contains all the flows in the project, with a separate entry for the project as a whole at the top. You can select individual or multiple flows in the flows list. NOTE The flows list uses the names of flows as shown in the Flows panel in Setup mode, which can be different to their entry in the Title field if you have changed their flow title.
Setup mode Layout Options dialog 2 ● Move Down : Moves the selected flows down the flows list, which changes their order in the project. ● Move Up project. ● Delete Flow : Moves the selected flows up the flows list, which changes their order in the : Deletes the selected flows. Information fields Allow you to enter information about the currently selected flows or the whole project in the corresponding field, such as Composer and Lyricist.
Setup mode Layout Options dialog The Layout Options dialog contains the following: 1 Search categories field Allows you to filter categories and section titles according to your entry. TIP You can set the focus to the Search categories field by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-L . You can set the focus away by pressing Tab . 2 Category list Contains the categories of options that you can view and change in the dialog.
Setup mode Layout Options dialog 6 ● Previous match: Allows you to navigate to the previous match on the page. You can also navigate to the previous match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-G . ● Next match: Allows you to navigate to the next match on the page. You can also navigate to the next match by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-G . ● Close: Closes the bar and removes all match highlights. You can also close the bar by pressing Esc . Layouts list Contains all the layouts in your project.
Setup mode Players, layouts, and flows RELATED LINKS Staves on page 909 Page formatting on page 367 Changing your preferred unit of measurement on page 45 Changing values in numeric value fields on page 150 Players, layouts, and flows In Dorico Elements, players, layouts, and flows are all connected to each other. Because they exist in the project rather than in a single score, you can, for example, have players and flows saved in the project without showing them in the full score.
Setup mode Players A piano player selected in the Players panel with connected flows and layouts highlighted in the Flows and Layouts panels EXAMPLE A work for string quartet and choir is divided into three movements. The string quartet is tacet for the third movement, which the choir sings a cappella. The Dorico project contains three flows (one for each movement), four solo players for the string quartet, four section players for the choir, and another solo player for a piano reduction.
Setup mode Players Solo player Represents a single person who can play one or more instruments. For example, a clarinettist who doubles on alto saxophone or a percussionist who plays bass drum, clash cymbals, and triangle. Section player Represents multiple people who all play the same instrument. For example, a violin section player might represent all eight desks of the Violin I section in an orchestra, or a soprano section player might represent the whole soprano section in a mixed voice choir.
Setup mode Players ● If you have started a new project, click Add Section Player ● In the Players panel action bar, click Add Solo Player ● In the Players panel action bar, click Add Section Player in the project start area. . . The instrument picker opens. TIP You can also open the instrument picker by selecting an existing player in the Players panel and pressing Shift-I . 2. Select the instrument you want in the instrument picker. 3. Press Return to add the selected instrument.
Setup mode Players Duplicating players You can duplicate existing players. This adds another player of the same type holding the same instruments as the original. NOTE In Dorico Elements, the maximum number of players you can have in a single project is 12. PROCEDURE ● In the Players panel, right-click the player you want to duplicate and choose Duplicate Player from the context menu. RESULT A new player is added, with the same instruments as the original player and is named after those instruments.
Setup mode Players Setting custom player orders You can change the order in which players’ staves appear in each layout independently, for example, if you want to have a different player order in a custom score layout than the default player order for your other layouts, as set by the order of players in the Players panel. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layout in which you want to set a custom player order.
Setup mode Ensembles ● Delete Player and Part Layouts: Deletes the player, the music, and all part layouts to which the player is assigned. NOTE The part layout cannot be deleted if it also contains other players. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 81 Deleting instruments on page 108 Ensembles If you add an ensemble in Dorico Elements, multiple players are added to your project at the same time. Dorico Elements provides a set of predefined ensembles that you can use.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 81 Instrument picker on page 83 Renaming players on page 130 Project start area on page 28 Starting new projects from project templates on page 55 Players, layouts, and flows on page 93 File import and export on page 59 Instruments In Dorico Elements, an instrument is an individual musical instrument, such as a piano, a flute, or a violin. Human voices, such as soprano or tenor, are also considered instruments.
Setup mode Instruments Edit Percussion Kit dialog on page 109 Instrument numbering It is customary to number instruments when there is more than one in a piece so that they can be easily identified, such as Horn 1 and Horn 2. Dorico Elements automatically numbers instruments where there are multiple instruments of the same type in the same project.
Setup mode Instruments Instrument names in staff labels on page 902 Transposing instruments on page 104 Instrument changes Instruments changes are when a player holding multiple instruments switches from playing one instrument to a different instrument. They are usually indicated in full scores and parts with text indications both after the last note before the change and at the first note after the change.
Setup mode Instruments RESULT Instrument changes are allowed in the selected layouts Allow instrument changes is activated, and disallowed when it is deactivated. NOTE Multiple instruments can only appear on the same staff with an instrument change if none of their notes overlap. If any of their notes do overlap, multiple staves are shown.
Setup mode Instruments RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows on page 906 Staff labels on page 901 Transposing instruments While most instruments produce notes at concert pitch, transposing instruments produce a note that is different to the one that is written. For example, two common orchestral transposing instruments are clarinet in B♭ and horn in F. When a clarinet in B♭ plays a C, the sound produced is a B♭, one whole step (tone) below.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE Any fretted instruments in projects created in earlier versions of Dorico Elements are automatically assigned the standard set of strings and tunings associated with that instrument when the project is first opened in Dorico Elements 3. The quickest way to change their tuning is changing the instrument type in the instrument picker.
Setup mode Instruments Starting new projects from project templates on page 55 Switching to galley/page view on page 42 Playback templates on page 473 Instrument changes on page 102 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 129 Changing instrument names on page 131 Adding empty percussion kits to players You can add empty percussion kits to players, to which you can then add unpitched percussion instruments. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Setup mode Instruments Changing instruments You can change the instruments held by players without affecting any music already entered onto their staves, for example, if your Clarinet part is very low and you want to change it to a Bass Clarinet or you want to change the tuning of a guitar. NOTE ● You cannot change percussion kits into other instruments, you can only change individual unpitched percussion instruments. ● You cannot change a pitched instrument into an unpitched instrument, and vice versa.
Setup mode Instruments instrument list for a solo player, for example, if you want to change the order of staves in the score. PREREQUISITE You have added the players to which you want to move instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the cards of the players holding the instruments you want to move. 2. Move instruments in any of the following ways: ● To change the order of instruments for a single player, click and drag a single instrument and release it at the required position.
Setup mode Instruments Edit Percussion Kit dialog The Edit Percussion Kit dialog allows you to make changes to percussion kits, including which instruments are included in them and how instruments are arranged in the different available kit presentations. ● The Edit Percussion Kit dialog opens automatically when you create empty kits or combine existing instruments into a kit.
Setup mode Instruments Allows you to select a percussion kit presentation type in order to edit how the selected percussion kit appears in that presentation type. 5 ● 5-line Staff: Kit instruments are shown on a five-line staff. You can determine which instruments are shown on each line and in each space of the staff. A single staff label containing the name of the kit is shown. ● Grid: Kit instruments are shown on a grid, with each instrument on its own line.
Setup mode Instruments Percussion kit presentation types on page 983 Changing the percussion kit presentation type on page 984 Percussion Instrument Playing Techniques dialog on page 985 Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments on page 985 Adding instruments to percussion kits You can add new instruments to percussion kits within the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit to which you want to add instruments. 2.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE Playing techniques expressed using playing technique-specific noteheads are not retained. Defining percussion kits as drum sets You can define individual percussion kits as drum sets. Drum sets use a different voicing than percussion kits when using the five-line staff presentation. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit you want to define as a drum set. 2.
Setup mode Instruments NOTE You can only include adjacent instruments in groups. 6. Click Add . RESULT A group is created containing the selected instruments. The group is given a default name that you can change. RELATED LINKS Players panel on page 81 Percussion kit presentation types on page 983 Renaming groups in grid presentation percussion kits Group names are shown as instrument labels. You can change the names of groups in percussion kits using grid presentation. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Instruments EXAMPLE Ungrouped grid presentation percussion kit Grid presentation percussion kit with wood blocks grouped RELATED LINKS Staff labels for percussion kits on page 907 Deleting groups within grid presentation percussion kits You can delete groups in percussion kits using grid presentation without deleting the instruments within the group. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the kit from whose grid presentation you want to delete groups. 2.
Setup mode Instruments 4. Click the percussion instruments and/or slash voices whose position you want to change. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one instrument or slash voice at a time. 5. Change the position of the selected instruments/slash voices in any of the following ways: ● Click Move up arrow to move them upwards. ● Click Move down arrow to move them downwards. ● Click and drag a single instrument upwards/downwards (five-line staff presentation only). 6.
Setup mode Instruments 2. Click the arrow that appears in the kit instrument label when you hover over it and choose Edit Percussion Kit to open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3. Click the instruments you want to remove from the kit. 4. Click Remove Instrument From Kit 5. Click Close. in the action bar. RESULT The selected instruments appears as individual instruments belonging to the same player but separate from the percussion kit. You can then move the instruments to other players if required.
Setup mode Instruments Allow you to edit individual or multiple strings. The following controls are available when at least one string is selected in the string editor: 4 ● Open pitch: Allows you to set the open pitch of the string using the note name and octave, such as C4 for middle C. If necessary, you can add # for sharp and b for flat. ● No. of frets: Allows you to set the number of frets for the selected strings.
Setup mode Instruments Changing the open pitches of fretted instrument strings You can change the open pitch of each fretted instrument string independently, for example, if your project requires an unconventional tuning that is not available as an instrument type in the instrument picker. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the fretted instrument whose open pitches you want to change. 2.
Setup mode Player groups Exporting fretted instrument tunings You can export fretted instrument tunings so you can reuse them for other instruments and in other projects. Fretted instrument tunings are exported as .doricotuning library files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel, expand the card of the player holding the fretted instrument whose tuning you want to export. 2.
Setup mode Player groups Adding player groups You can organize players into groups, for example, if you want to bracket them together. Players in different groups are also numbered separately. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: If you want to add a group that includes existing players, select those players in the Players panel. 2. In the Players panel action bar, click Add Group . RESULT A new player group is added to the Players panel. If you selected players, those players are added to the group.
Setup mode Player groups Adding players to groups You can add existing or new players to player groups. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player, one ensemble, or one group. PROCEDURE ● In the Players panel, do one of the following: ● Select one or more players and click Add Group. ● Select a group, and click Add Solo Player, Add Section Player, or Add Ensemble. RESULT If you clicked Add Group, a new group is added for the selected players.
Setup mode Flows Flows Flows are separate spans of music that are completely independent in musical content, meaning they can contain completely different players from each other and have different time signatures and key signatures. A single project can contain any number of flows.
Setup mode Flows RELATED LINKS Flows panel on page 87 Importing flows on page 59 Adding solo/section players on page 95 Assigning players to flows on page 123 Assigning flows to layouts on page 126 Duplicating flows You can duplicate flows, for example, if you want to experiment with some ideas without affecting the original flow or if you want to copy material with any barlines you have added.
Setup mode Layouts Tacets on page 389 Assigning flows to layouts on page 126 Assigning players to layouts on page 125 Deleting flows You can delete flows that you no longer need. This deletes all music for all instruments belonging to all players in the flows. PROCEDURE 1. In the Flows panel, select the flows you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete .
Setup mode Layouts RELATED LINKS Page formatting on page 367 Flows on page 122 Players on page 94 Players, layouts, and flows on page 93 Player, layout, and instrument names on page 129 Brackets according to ensemble type on page 594 Local vs. global properties on page 149 Creating layouts You can create any number of full score, custom score, and part layouts in each project. By default, Dorico Elements creates a single full score layout and a part layout for each instrument.
Setup mode Layouts 2. In the Players panel, activate the checkbox in the card of each player you want to assign to the layout. TIP You can Shift -click to activate/deactivate the checkboxes in multiple player cards at once. 3. Optional: Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any other layouts whose assigned players you want to change. RESULT Players are assigned to the selected layout when the checkbox in their player card is activated, and removed from the layout when the checkbox is deactivated.
Setup mode Layouts RELATED LINKS Layouts panel (Setup mode) on page 85 Flows panel on page 87 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch You can change whether each layout in your project is transposing or concert pitch. In Dorico Elements, full score layouts are concert pitch and part layouts are transposing by default.
Setup mode Layouts Transposed pitch When music is in transposed pitch, the notes written are the ones each instrument must play in order to produce the desired sounding pitch. For example, if a clarinet in B♭ reads a D in transposed pitch, the pitch that sounds from the instrument is C. Transposing scores and parts also transpose key signatures according to the transposition of the instrument.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RELATED LINKS Layouts panel (Setup mode) on page 85 Players, layouts, and flows on page 93 Restoring default layouts You can recreate all the part layouts that Dorico Elements provides by default, for example, if you accidentally deleted some part layouts. PROCEDURE ● Choose Setup > Create Default Part Layouts.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names default, which are then used whenever you add that instrument again in the current project and all future projects. NOTE Changing the default instrument names does not change the instrument names of existing instruments of that type in your project.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names Renaming layouts You can rename layouts and reset renamed layouts to their default name, for example, to include the appropriate instrument transposition for layouts with transposition overrides. Layout names appear at the top of part layouts by default. PROCEDURE 1. In the Layouts panel, select the layout you want to rename. 2. Press Return to open the layout name text field. 3.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names 5. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The instrument names for the selected instrument are changed. ● If you did not save your changes as default, only the names of the selected instrument are changed. Any instruments of the same type added later or in future projects use the original default names.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names The Edit Instrument Names dialog contains the following options and sections: 1 Editing instrument Displays the permanent underlying name of the instrument. 2 Editing Allows you to switch between editing the Singular names and Plural names of the selected instrument. Singular names is used when staff labels are shown by default, Plural names is used when the staff contains multiple players.
Setup mode Player, layout, and instrument names NOTE Staff labels always use the alignment set for the paragraph style, they do not use the alignment set in the Edit Instrument Names dialog. This ensures consistent alignment across the whole system. 9 Show transposition Allows you to choose when the transposition is shown in the instrument name for the selected instrument. It is common to see the transposition included in the name of transposing instruments, such as Clarinet in B♭.
Setup mode Flow names and flow titles RESULT The instrument names for the selected instrument are reset to the current default settings for its instrument type. If you changed the default name for the instrument type after adding the instrument, resetting its names changes them to your new default names. TIP You can assign a key command for Reset Instrument Names on the Key Commands page in Preferences, which resets all instrument names in the project to their default settings.
Setup mode Videos 3. Press Return . RESULT The name of the flow is changed. If you have not entered a different title for the flow in the Project Info dialog, the title shown in the music area is updated to match the new flow name. TIP You can also rename flows in the Project Info dialog. RELATED LINKS Flows panel on page 87 Changing flow titles You can change flow titles in the Project Info dialog. Once you have done so, flow titles are no longer automatically changed if you change their flow name.
Setup mode Videos TIP You can use these features, including setting a project frame rate, without having a video attached. RELATED LINKS Adding videos on page 139 Frame rates on page 141 Timecodes on page 849 Markers on page 844 Changing the volume of video audio on page 141 Supported video formats Dorico Elements uses the same video engine that was introduced in Cubase and Nuendo in 2017. It supports the most commonly-used video formats.
Setup mode Videos The Video Properties dialog contains the following fields and options: Video file Shows the location of the video file on your computer. This field is read-only. Video frame rate Shows the frame rate of the video file. This field is read-only. Project frame rate Allows you to select a frame rate for your project from the menu. You can only have a single frame rate across the project. Use video frame rate Sets the project frame rate to be the same as the video file.
Setup mode Videos Adding videos You can add a video to each flow in your project. You can also follow these steps to reload videos previously added to the project that Dorico Elements can no longer locate. Flows with missing videos show a warning icon instead of the video icon in the flow card in the Flows panel. This can happen if you send a project to someone else without the video file. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one player to the project. PROCEDURE 1.
Setup mode Videos RESULT Changing the value for Flow attachment position changes the rhythmic position in the music at which the video starts. Changing the value for Video start offset changes the position in the video that occurs at the Flow attachment position. For example, if you change the Video start offset to 00:00:05:00 and the Flow attachment position to 8, then the fifth second in the video happens on the eighth beat in the music. NOTE ● The initial rhythmic position is 0.
Setup mode Videos Removing videos You can remove videos from each flow independently. PROCEDURE ● In the Flows panel, right-click the flow from which you want to remove a video and choose Video > Detach from the context menu. RESULT The video is removed from the selected flow. RELATED LINKS Flows panel on page 87 Changing the volume of video audio Any audio that is part of a video you have added is played back in sync with the music in the project. You can change the video volume manually.
Setup mode Videos All the common frame rates, such as 23.976, 24, 24.975, 25, 29.97, and 30 frames per second, are fully supported in Dorico Elements. By default, Dorico Elements uses the same frame rate for the project as the video file, but you can manually choose a different frame rate. RELATED LINKS Timecodes on page 849 Changing the project frame rate By default, Dorico Elements uses the video frame rate as the project frame rate.
Write mode Write mode allows you to input and edit your music, including changing the rhythmic positions of items, changing the pitch of notes, and deleting notes and items. The available toolboxes and panels allow you to input all the notes and notation items that are most commonly used. By design, you cannot move notes and items graphically in Write mode. Graphical adjustments are only possible in Engrave mode in Dorico Pro.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Contains the note durations, accidentals, and articulations that are most commonly used during note input. 3 Notations panel Contains notation items that you can add to your music, such as dynamics and playing techniques, divided into separate categories. Your current selection in the Notations toolbox determines which notation items are shown.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Chords When this option is activated, you add multiple notes at the same rhythmic position in order to build a chord. This function prevents the caret from advancing automatically after inputting a note. It also allows you to copy notes and items without overwriting any existing notes or items. You can also start/stop chord input by pressing Q .
Write mode Project window in Write mode Rests When this option is activated, you input rests of the currently selected duration instead of notes. You can also start/stop rest input by pressing , . Tuplets Clicking this option inputs a triplet bracket and the respective number of rests at the specified rhythmic position. If the notes are beamed, no brackets are used. You can input other types of tuplet, such as quintuplets, by using the tuplets popover.
Write mode Project window in Write mode ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-7 . ● Click the disclosure arrow on the left edge of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Left Panel. The upper part of the Notes panel contains note durations that you can select for input or to change the duration of existing notes. By default, only the most common note durations are shown. You can see all note durations by clicking the Show/Hide All Notes disclosure arrows at the top and bottom of the section.
Write mode Project window in Write mode The Properties panel contains a group of properties for each notation item. When you select a note or item in the music area, the Properties panel displays the groups and options that you might require to edit the selected note or item. If there are more available groups than can fit in the panel simultaneously, you can scroll to the right/left along the displayed groups.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Changing your preferred unit of measurement on page 45 Changing values in numeric value fields on page 150 Resetting the appearance of items on page 344 Resetting the position of items on page 344 Local vs. global properties Properties can affect items only in the current layout and frame chain or in all layouts and frame chains.
Write mode Project window in Write mode RESULT The property scope is changed. All subsequent local properties you change take effect only in the current layout and frame chain if you chose Locally, or in all layouts and frame chains if you chose Globally. NOTE This only applies to subsequent properties you change. If you want to change the property scope of existing properties, you can copy property settings to other layouts and frame chains.
Write mode Project window in Write mode RELATED LINKS Properties panel (Write mode) on page 147 Layout Options dialog on page 90 Changing your preferred unit of measurement on page 45 Notations toolbox The options in the Notations toolbox allow you to determine what notation items are available in the Notations panel. The Notations toolbox is located on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Project window in Write mode Bars and Barlines Hides/Shows the Bars and Barlines panel, which allows you to insert bars and to input the different types of barlines. Holds and Pauses Hides/Shows the Holds and Pauses panel, which contains sections for the different types of fermatas, breath marks, and caesuras that you can input. Playing Techniques Hides/Shows the Playing Techniques panel, which contains sections for the various instrument family groups.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing Fingering Opens the fingerings popover above the selected note on the staff, which allows you to input fingerings. RELATED LINKS Project window in Write mode on page 143 Notations input on page 209 Text editor options in Write mode on page 308 Video Properties dialog on page 137 Notations panel The Notations panel contains different notation items for your music depending on your selection in the Notations toolbox.
Write mode Inputting vs. editing note into the score, by pressing the letter name of the note on your computer keyboard, or by playing the note or chord on your MIDI keyboard. When the caret is activated, notes and notations are input at the caret position. If no notes or chords are selected in the music area and you select a duration, either by pressing its key command or by clicking it in the Notes panel, mouse input is activated.
Write mode Rhythmic grid this option is deactivated, you can only input an item loaded onto your mouse pointer once. If you want to input the item at multiple positions, you must reselect it each time. NOTE Changing your preferences permanently changes the functionality for the current project and all new projects.
Write mode Rhythmic grid The rhythmic grid controls the following: ● The possible input positions when using the caret or the mouse, and when copying and pasting. For example, setting the rhythmic grid resolution to 32nd notes allows you to input notes and items at a greater number of possible rhythmic positions than when the rhythmic grid is set to quarter notes. ● The amount by which the caret moves when using Right Arrow / Left Arrow . ● The amount by which notes and items are lengthened/shortened.
Write mode Note input Note input In Dorico Elements, you can only input notes during note input, which is when the caret is activated. This allows you to input notations at the caret position at the same time as inputting notes, and also reduces the risk of you adding notes to staves accidentally.
Write mode Note input the notes in those chords onto multiple staves. The note symbol and rhythmic grid also appear for each included staff. Caret when inputting notes onto multiple staves Insert The caret shows V and inverted V shapes at the top and bottom. In Insert mode, inserted notes shift all music in the current voice after the caret along by the input duration instead of replacing existing notes.
Write mode Note input Grace Notes The caret is shorter than the default caret. It allows you to input grace notes at the caret position.
Write mode Note input Caret when inputting notes into percussion kits Tablature The caret appears significantly smaller than usual when inputting notes into tablature. On tablature, the caret behaves as if chord input is always active, meaning you must advance the caret and move it to other string lines manually.
Write mode Note input Extending the caret to multiple staves You can extend the caret so it spans multiple staves. This allows you to input notes and notations onto multiple staves simultaneously, including automatically exploding the notes in chords that you play on a MIDI keyboard onto the appropriate staves. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Activate the caret in any of the following ways: ● Select an item and press Shift-N . ● Double-click a rhythmic position on a staff.
Write mode Note input ● These steps describe selecting rhythm dots, articulations, and accidentals not in the prevailing key signature before inputting notes. However, you can also select them after inputting notes. If you change this setting, you must perform step 7 before steps 4 to 6. ● You do not have to input rests between notes, as Dorico Elements automatically shows implicit rests of the appropriate duration between the notes you input.
Write mode Note input ● ● To input a note below the previously input note, press Ctrl-Alt (Windows) or Ctrl (macOS) as well as the letter for the note, for example, Ctrl-Alt-A (Windows) or Ctrl-A (macOS) . Click the staff at the rhythmic position of each note you want to input. A shadow notehead appears when inputting with the mouse to indicate where the note will be input. ● 8. Play the notes on a MIDI keyboard.
Write mode Note input Selecting note/rest durations on page 169 Inputting notes with rhythm dots on page 172 Inputting accidentals on page 185 Inputting articulations on page 209 Inputting chords on page 192 Inputting rests on page 187 Inputting tuplets on page 194 Adding notes above/below existing notes on page 197 Moving notes rhythmically on page 725 Creating cross-staff beams on page 583 Note and rest grouping on page 590 Beam grouping according to meters on page 575 Notations input on page 209 Playing/
Write mode Note input Inputting notes using pitch before duration You can input notes into your project by specifying their pitch before their duration, meaning you can test pitches before inputting them without leaving note input. You can input notes with a computer keyboard, with the mouse, or by playing notes with a MIDI keyboard. By default in Dorico Elements, you must specify the duration before the pitch of notes.
Write mode Note input 6. Optional: Select any required rhythm dots. 7. Select a pitch in any of the following ways: ● Press the corresponding letters on your computer keyboard. TIP Dorico Elements automatically selects the note whose register is the smallest interval away from the previously input note. However, you can force a different register. ● To input a note above the previously input note, press Shift-Alt/Opt as well as the letter for the note, for example, Shift-Alt/Opt-A .
Write mode Note input Dorico Elements notates and beams notes appropriately according to their duration, the current time signature, and their position in the bar. This includes showing notes as tie chains if required. If you advance the caret without inputting notes, Dorico Elements fills the gaps between notes with implicit rests of the appropriate duration.
Write mode Note input ● To input/record notes at their sounding pitch, choose Write > Input Pitch > Sounding Pitch. RESULT The resulting pitch notated or recorded is changed. For example, if you input a C in a Horn in F transposing part layout with the input pitch set to Sounding Pitch, the note is written as a G.
Write mode Note input Activating/Deactivating mouse input You can activate/deactivate mouse input, for example, if you only want to input notes using your computer keyboard or MIDI device. Deactivating mouse input also allows you to click other items to stop note input. PROCEDURE ● In the Notes toolbox, activate/deactivate Select . RESULT is deactivated. Mouse input is Mouse input is activated in the current project when Select deactivated in the current project when Select is activated.
Write mode Note input Changing the duration of notes You can lengthen/shorten the duration of notes after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose duration you want to change. NOTE If you want to extend a note to the end of the current selection, select both that note and an item at the rhythmic position to which you want to extend the note. 2. Change the duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the key command of the duration you want.
Write mode Note input TIP You can assign your own key commands to lengthen/shorten notes by specific durations and to extend them. You can find these by searching for Shorten duration by, Lengthen duration by, and Extend to on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Write mode Note input RESULT During note or rest input, any notes you input are notated with their whole rhythmic value, whatever their position in the bar. If you move them later, they keep the same notation. Rests are input as explicit rests. Notes that cross barlines are notated as tied notes. Forcing the duration of existing notes or rests preserves their current duration or any duration to which you subsequently change them.
Write mode Note input ● Select existing notes to which you want to add rhythm dots. 2. Optional: If you want to input notes with rhythm dots onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Select a note duration in any of the following ways: ● Press the number on your computer keyboard that corresponds to the duration you want. For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets).
Write mode Note input Caret on page 157 Insert mode on page 179 Chord mode on page 194 Selecting note/rest durations on page 169 Activating/Deactivating the caret on page 160 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 161 Inputting notes in Insert mode on page 178 Changing the note-based notation input setting on page 168 Inputting notes into multiple voices By default, notes are input into the first up-stem voice, as indicated by the symbol of an up-stem quarter note beside the caret.
Write mode Note input contains notes in another voice, the stem directions of existing notes at the same rhythmic position change automatically as necessary. The quarter note symbol beside the caret changes to indicate which voice is currently selected. Any notes input are input into the voice indicated by this symbol. You can switch between voices as often as you like. NOTE ● If you have three or more voices on a single staff, you can only cycle through all the voices in a set order.
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input slash voices. 2. Press Shift-N to start note input. 3. Select the slash voice into which you want to input notes in one of the following ways: ● To input notes into a new slash voice, press Shift-Alt/Opt-V to create a new slash voice. When a new slash voice is added, a + sign appears beside the symbol of a note beside the caret, which now appears as a slash note.
Write mode Note input EXAMPLE Caret when inputting notes into the first upstem slash voice Caret when inputting notes into the first downstem slash voice Caret when inputting notes into a new stemless slash voice Caret when inputting notes into a new, second up-stem slash voice RELATED LINKS Slash voices on page 1001 Rhythm slashes on page 869 Inputting slash regions on page 332 Changing the voice of existing notes on page 353 Inputting notes and notations onto multiple staves You can input notes and
Write mode Note input 6. Press Esc or Return to stop note input. RESULT The notes and notations you input are input at the caret position on all staves across which the caret extends. If the caret extends across both staves of a piano, notes are input on either the top or bottom staff according to their pitch and your set split point on the Play page in Preferences. When inputting notes using a MIDI keyboard, the individual notes in any chords you input are automatically exploded across the staves.
Write mode Note input 7. Press Esc or Return to stop note input. RESULT Notes are inserted before existing notes in the voice indicated by the caret indicator, without overwriting any existing notes in the same voice at rhythmic positions after the caret. They are input at the caret position or where you click. Any existing notes in the same voice after the caret are pushed ahead to subsequent rhythmic positions.
Write mode Note input Inputting notes with rhythm dots on page 172 Deleting notes and items on page 350 Inputting notes for unpitched percussion You can input notes for individual unpitched percussion instruments and on all percussion instruments in percussion kits using any presentation type, including selecting playing techniques, such as playing technique-specific noteheads, for individual instruments.
Write mode Note input For example, press 6 for quarter notes (crotchets). Press smaller numbers for smaller durations, such as 5 for eighth notes (quavers) and 4 for 16th notes (semiquavers). Press larger numbers for larger durations, such as 7 for half notes (minims). ● 5. In the Notes panel, click the duration you want. Select an appropriate playing technique for the instrument currently selected by the caret before inputting notes. ● Press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow to cycle upwards through playing techniques.
Write mode Note input Dorico Elements notates and beams notes appropriately according to their duration, the current time signature, and their position in the bar. This includes showing notes as tie chains if required. If you advance the caret without inputting notes, Dorico Elements fills the gaps between notes with implicit rests of the appropriate duration. NOTE ● You can specify custom beat groupings within individual time signatures. ● You cannot delete rests from unpitched percussion instruments.
Write mode Note input When you select Use staff position, you can designate one octave of your MIDI keyboard to input playing techniques. By default, the Input techniques from MIDI key option is set to MIDI note 48, which is C3, the C one octave below middle C (C4 = MIDI note 60). You can click the MIDI learn button and then play a note on your MIDI keyboard to change the starting pitch.
Write mode Note input The default stem direction behavior for inputting notes in kits in Dorico Elements means that you can alternate pressing F and C , and the notes are input at the positions of the kick drum and snare drum, even though the top line is the closer position after inputting a snare drum note. This is because the kick drum uses the same stem direction, and therefore voice, as the snare drum.
Write mode Note input For fret numbers 10 and above, press the two digits quickly. ● Press the corresponding letters on your computer keyboard. NOTE When using letters, Dorico Elements automatically chooses the octave closest to the nut on the corresponding string. ● 5. 6. Play the note on a MIDI keyboard. Move the caret up/down to input notes on different strings at the same rhythmic position in any of the following ways: ● Press Up Arrow to move it up. ● Press Down Arrow to move it down.
Write mode Note input This also applies if you are using a MIDI keyboard, though you can respell notes if the accidentals chosen automatically are not the ones that you expected. ● These steps describe selecting accidentals before inputting each note. However, you can change this setting if you prefer to specify accidentals after inputting notes. PROCEDURE 1. 2. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Note input Accidental selection during MIDI input Dorico Elements interprets MIDI data to create accidentals, and automatically determines the spelling of notes according to preset rules. Dorico Elements automatically displays an accidental if one is required. It selects a sharp or flat based on key signature and context. The algorithm for this takes into account the key signature and the intervals between successive notes and chords.
Write mode Note input 8. Optional: Press , or click Rests again to stop rest input. 9. Press Esc or Return to stop note input. RESULT Rests of the selected duration are input. If Force Duration is not activated, Dorico Elements automatically combines adjacent rests as appropriate for their position in relation to notes and according to the current meter. RELATED LINKS Rests on page 879 Implicit vs.
Write mode Note input NOTE Alternatively, you can click Insert Bar Rest in the Insert Bar Rest section of the Bars and Barlines panel to input bar rests during note input. RELATED LINKS Bars on page 553 Bars and barlines popover on page 235 Inputting notes into multiple voices on page 174 Caret on page 157 Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars on page 884 Inputting ties You can input ties manually to join two notes of the same pitch, both during note input and by joining two existing notes with a tie.
Write mode Note input NOTE The second note must be the same pitch as the first note. RESULT During note input, the two notes input are joined by a tie. If you selected a single existing note, it is joined by a tie to the next note of the same pitch in the same voice and staff. If you selected two existing notes, they are tied together, provided they are the same pitch and belong to the same instrument.
Write mode Note input PROCEDURE 1. Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input grace notes. 2. Press Shift-N to start note input. 3. Optional: If you want to input grace notes onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 4. Start grace note input in any of the following ways: ● Press / . ● In the Notes toolbox, click Grace Notes . 5. Press the number for the note duration you want. For example, press 5 for eighth grace notes. 6.
Write mode Note input Inputting chords You can input chords during note input when both note input and Chords are activated. You can input notes with a computer keyboard, with the mouse, or by playing notes with a MIDI keyboard. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting notes with the default preference of duration before pitch. However, you can also specify the pitch before duration instead.
Write mode Note input TIP Dorico Elements automatically inputs notes above the highest note at the caret position when Chords is activated. You can input notes below the lowest note at the caret position instead by pressing CtrlAlt (Windows) or Ctrl (macOS) as well as the letter for the note name, for example, Ctrl-Alt-A (Windows) or Ctrl-A (macOS) . ● Click the staff at the rhythmic positions where you want to input notes.
Write mode Note input Chord mode Chord mode changes how notes are input and how edits you make outside of note input affect the music. When Chord mode is activated, notes can overlap or stack on top of each other to create chords rather than overwriting existing notes. During chord input, the caret does not advance automatically. Edits outside of chord input that are affected by Chord mode include copying/pasting notes or changing their duration.
Write mode Note input NOTE If you do not specify the beat unit, the tuplet is based on the note value currently selected in the Notes panel. 6. Press Return to close the popover. The tuplet is entered. 7. Optional: Change the selected note duration. For example, you can input a tuplet based on eighth notes but input a quarter note within that tuplet. 8. Enter or play in the pitches you want. 9.
Write mode Note input Tuplets button in the Notes toolbox Tuplets popover with an example entry NOTE Clicking Tuplets popover. in the Notes toolbox only inputs a single triplet. It does not open the tuplets When inputting tuplets with the keyboard, Dorico Elements continues inputting notes as the specified tuplet until any of the following happens: ● You press : to return to inputting normal notes. ● You move the caret with the arrow keys. ● You stop note input.
Write mode Note input NOTE Unless you specify a beat unit in your entry, the total duration of the tuplet depends on the note value selected when you open the popover. For example, if a quarter note is selected when you input a triplet, the triplet input is three quarter notes in the space of two.
Write mode Note input Add intervals popover The add intervals popover allows you to add notes above and below existing notes, and also transpose existing notes. It makes much of the functionality provided by the Add Notes Above or Below and Transpose dialogs accessible directly via the keyboard. You can open the add intervals popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when notes are selected, including during note input: ● Press Shift-I . ● Choose Write > Add Intervals Popover.
Write mode Note input Example action Popover entry Specify diatonic interval. diat or diatonic Transpose notes by microtonal intervals. t 3 8 qt NOTE The first number is the interval degree. The second number is the number of quarter tones. If you do not otherwise specify it, the interval is calculated by adding or transposing notes by the number of staff positions specified. For example, in C major, if the selected note is a D♮ and you specify 3 to add a third above, the added note is an F♮.
Write mode Note input If the pitch is now impossible to play on a fretted instrument, such as if a note would have to be played below the nut on the lowest string, it appears on tablature as a question mark. NOTE You can press Alt/Opt-Up Arrow and Alt/Opt-Down Arrow to change the staff positions of notes in percussion kits using grid and five-line staff presentation types. However, this also changes the instrument playing the note.
Write mode Note input EXAMPLE A G sharp When respelled downwards, the G sharp becomes an F triplesharp When respelled upwards, When respelled upwards the G sharp becomes an again, the G sharp A flat becomes a B triple-flat RELATED LINKS Accidentals on page 541 Transposing existing notes with the add intervals popover You can change the pitch of notes after they have been input using the add intervals popover. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to transpose. 2.
Write mode Note input 6. Optional: Press L or click Lock to Duration again to deactivate Lock to Duration. NOTE Lock to Duration automatically deactivates when you reach the last existing note on the staff. By default, normal note input continues using the previous note value selected before you activated Lock to Duration. RESULT Existing notes on the selected staff are repitched without their rhythms being changed.
Write mode Note input Transpose dialog The Transpose dialog allows you to transpose selections of notes simultaneously, including key signatures. You can transpose according to an interval and quality or by a set number of octave divisions. ● You can open the Transpose dialog in Write mode by making a selection in the music area and choosing Write > Transpose.
Write mode MIDI recording notes in the Calculate interval section, click Apply, and Dorico Elements automatically sets the required transposition options for you. NOTE The Transpose dialog does not allow transpositions that would result in impossible notations, such as sharper than a triple sharp, or that require a microtonal accidental that does not exist in the tonality system in place at the position of your selection.
Write mode MIDI recording ● If you want to hear a click during your recording, you have input a time signature. There is no click in open meter or when there is no time signature. ● You have chosen the appropriate input pitch setting. PROCEDURE 1. Select a note or rest on the staff/instrument track into which you want to record notes, at the position from which you want to record. You can do this in Write mode and Play mode.
Write mode MIDI recording Inputting notes into multiple voices on page 174 Resetting playback overrides on page 516 MIDI Quantize Options dialog on page 68 Retrieving played notes that you did not record During playback, you can play notes on your MIDI keyboard and hear them without recording them into the score. You can use retrospective recording to retrieve these notes and input them into the project without previously explicitly recording them.
Write mode MIDI recording 3. Change the quantization settings as appropriate for your selection. 4. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. RESULT The notated durations of all selected notes are changed according to the quantization options you set. This does not affect their played duration in playback.
Write mode MIDI recording 4. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Increasing the latency compensation value increases the time between pressing the key and the note being notated. This is useful if the notes you record were previously notated ahead of the beat. Decreasing the latency compensation value decreases the time between pressing the key and the note being notated. This is useful if the notes you record were previously notated behind the beat.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click Play in the category list. 3. In the Recording subsection, activate/deactivate Import CC64 as pedal lines. 4. Optional: If you activated Import CC64 as pedal lines, activate/deactivate Snap pedal lines to previous beat. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT When Import CC64 as pedal lines is activated, the MIDI controller CC64 is interpreted as pedal lines.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select the existing notes to which you want to add articulations. 2. Optional: If you want to input notes with articulations onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Select the articulations you want to input in any of the following ways: 4. ● Press the key commands for the articulations you want. ● Click the articulations you want in the Notes panel.
Write mode Notations input Type of articulation Key command Unstressed: @ (Windows) or " (macOS) Staccato: ] Tenuto: # (Windows) or \ (macOS) Staccatissimo: , , or } Combined tenuto and staccato: ~ (Windows) or | (macOS) RELATED LINKS Articulations on page 547 Inputting slurs You can input slurs, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input 4. During note input, input the notes you want. The slur extends automatically, even if there are rests between the notes you input. 5. During note input, press Shift-S to end the slur on the currently selected note. RESULT During note input, slurs begin from the currently selected note on all staves across which the caret extends, not from the caret position. Slurs extend automatically as you input notes, and end on the currently selected note.
Write mode Notations input 2. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 3. Press Shift-F to open the fingerings popover. 4. Optional: If you are inputting fingerings for fretted instruments, change the hand in one of the following ways: ● To switch to the right hand, press Down Arrow . ● To switch to the left hand, press Up Arrow . The popover icon updates to show the current hand. 5.
Write mode Notations input Fingerings popover The following tables contain examples of what you can enter into the fingerings popover to input the different types of fingerings available. The fingerings popover behaves differently for fretted instruments compared to other instruments, so there is a separate table for fretted instrument fingerings. You can open the fingerings popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either a note is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-F .
Write mode Notations input Type of fingering Example popover entry Right-hand fingerings (non-fretted instruments) R5, D5, or M5 Thumb indicator (non-fretted instruments) T Multiple fingerings for individual notes, for example, for ornaments such as mordents or turns 2343 Single fingerings for multiple notes: enter the same fingering number for two adjacent notes. 1,1 For example, in keyboard music the thumb may depress two keys simultaneously.
Write mode Notations input Fingerings for valved brass instruments on page 670 Input methods for key signatures You can input key signatures with the keyboard by using the key signatures popover, and with the mouse by using the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel. RELATED LINKS Key signatures on page 693 Key signatures popover The table contains the entries for the key signatures popover that you can use to input the different key signatures available.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Key signatures on page 693 Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel The Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel allows you to create and input common key signatures. ● You can hide/show the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel by clicking Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals in the Notations toolbox on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input Inputting key signatures with the popover You can input key signatures using the key signatures popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input key signatures only on single staves. NOTE It is not necessary to input different key signatures for transposing instruments, as Dorico Elements automatically shows the appropriate key signatures for transposing instruments in transposing layouts. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input Key signatures popover on page 216 Accidental selection during MIDI input on page 187 Key signatures on page 693 Moving key signatures rhythmically on page 697 Transposing instruments on page 104 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch on page 127 Inputting key signatures with the panel You can input key signatures using the Key Signatures, Tonality Systems, and Accidentals panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input NOTE An individual key signature on a single staff is not intended for transposing instruments. Transpositions of notes and key signatures are done automatically for transposing instruments.
Write mode Notations input Time signatures Type of time signature Popover entry Simple time signatures 2/4, 6/8, 3/4, 5/4, and so on For example, 2/4, 6/8, 3/4, 5/4 and so on Alternating time signatures, such as 6/8+3/4 6/8 + 3/4 NOTE You must include spaces either side of the plus sign.
Write mode Notations input Pick-up bars Example time signature with pick-up bar Popover entry 4/4 time signature with a dotted quarter note pick-up 4/4,1.5 6/8 time signature with a pick-up of two eighth 6/8,2 notes 2/2 time signature with a quarter note pick-up 2/2,0.5 TIP The number after the comma indicates multiples of the rhythmic unit specified by the denominator of the time signature. These lists are not comprehensive, as there are many possible time signatures and pick-up bars.
Write mode Notations input The Create Time Signature section contains the following parts: 1 Time signature type menu Allows you to select one of the following types of time signatures: 2 ● Regular ● Additive ● Interchangeable ● Aggregate ● Alternating Time signature spaces Allows you to combine up to four time signatures. For example, you can specify only one time signature for a regular time signature, but for an alternating time signature, you might want to include three time signatures.
Write mode Notations input Inputting time signatures with the popover You can input time signatures using the time signatures popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input time signatures only on single staves. NOTE Dorico Elements does not automatically add beats to fill bars according to the new time signature at the end of the affected region unless Insert mode is activated. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input Inputting barlines with the popover on page 240 Inputting time signatures with the panel You can input time signatures using the Time Signatures (Meter) panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also input time signatures only on single staves. NOTE ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection.
Write mode Notations input Time signature styles on page 956 Changing the separator style of interchangeable time signatures on page 958 Inputting pick-up bars with the panel on page 227 Inputting barlines with the panel on page 242 Inputting notes in Insert mode on page 178 Inputting pick-up bars with the popover You can input pick-up bars as part of time signatures using the time signatures popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input NOTE Dorico Elements does not automatically insert beats at the start of existing music to which you add time signatures with pick-up bars. If you add a pick-up bar at the start of a flow, that flow now begins in the pick-up bar, not in the first full bar. You can insert beats at the start to push existing music to later rhythmic positions.
Write mode Notations input NOTE Not all pick-up bar lengths are possible when using the panel. For example, you cannot produce a single eighth note upbeat in 6/8 with the available options. In such cases, you must use the time signatures popover. 7. Input the pick-up bar in one of the following ways: ● To input a pick-up bar on all staves, click the input time signature button in the Create Time Signature section.
Write mode Notations input Tempo popover The following tables contain examples of what you can enter into the tempo popover to input tempo marks, tempo equations, and rhythmic feels for swing playback. When you start entering a tempo into the tempo popover, a menu appears with suggestions containing the letters/words you enter. You can select one of these suggestions to input, or enter your own tempo into the popover.
Write mode Notations input Example tempo mark Popover entry più più or piu meno meno Faster, with energy Faster, with energy This list is not comprehensive as you can enter tempos freely and there are many possible metronome marks, tempo marks, and tempo equations. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different types of tempo marks and metronome marks. NOTE The tempo popover is case-sensitive.
Write mode Notations input Rhythmic feels for swing playback Rhythmic feel Popover entry Light 16th note swing rhythmic feel light swing 16ths Light eighth note swing rhythmic feel light swing 8ths Medium 16th note swing rhythmic feel medium swing 16ths Medium eighth note swing rhythmic feel medium swing 8ths Heavy 16th note swing rhythmic feel heavy swing 16ths Heavy eighth note swing rhythmic feel heavy swing 8ths Straight rhythmic feel straight (no swing) Triplet 16th fixed rhythmic feel
Write mode Notations input Absolute Tempo Change Contains a range of tempos with both an Italian tempo indication and a metronome mark. You can later choose to show or hide the metronome mark for individual tempo marks. You can change the range shown in the list by adjusting the slider at the top. Gradual Tempo Change Contains tempo marks that indicate a change in tempo over a defined period of time, such as rallentando or accelerando. You can add modifiers to gradual tempo changes.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Tempo marks on page 926 Types of tempo marks on page 927 Changing the metronome mark value on page 933 Inputting tempo marks with the popover You can input tempo marks using the tempo popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a tempo mark.
Write mode Notations input RESULT During note input, tempo marks are input at the caret position. Gradual tempo changes, such as rallentando, are also input at the caret position with a default duration of a quarter note. Gradual tempo changes do not extend as you input notes. When adding tempo marks to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. Gradual tempo changes span the duration of the selected items.
Write mode Notations input NOTE You can only add modifiers to a Gradual Tempo Change or a Relative Tempo Change. RESULT During note input, tempo marks are input at the caret position. Gradual tempo changes, such as rallentando, are also input at the caret position with a default duration of a quarter note. Gradual tempo changes do not extend as you input notes. When adding tempo marks to existing music, they are added at the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item.
Write mode Notations input Bars and barlines popover with an example entry for inputting bars Bars and barlines popover with an example entry for a barline Bars and Barlines button in the Notations toolbox Bars Example action Popover entry Add two bars 2 or +2 Add fourteen bars 14 or +14 Delete one bar –1 Delete six bars –6 Add a bar rest rest Delete empty bars at the end of the flow trim This list is not comprehensive, as you can add and delete any number of bars using the popover.
Write mode Notations input Beat unit Popover entry 64th note z or 2 32nd note y or 3 16th note x or 4 Eighth note e or 5 Quarter note q or 6 Half note h or 7 Whole note w or 8 Double whole note 2w or 9 Rhythm dot .
Write mode Notations input Bars and Barlines panel The Bars and Barlines panel allows you to input bars, bar rests, and different types of barlines. It is located on the right of the window in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Bars and Barlines panel by clicking Bars and Barlines Notations toolbox on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The number of bars or beats specified is input. During note input, bars/beats are input from the caret position. If the caret is in the middle of the bar when inputting bars, sufficient beats are added to ensure that the final bar created has the correct number of beats. The caret position stays at its previous position so you can continue inputting music from the same position.
Write mode Notations input If you selected Start of Selection, bars are input directly after a selected barline, and directly before a selected note, bar, or time signature. TIP Another way to add bars is by choosing a note duration, such as a whole note when in a 4/4 time signature, and pressing Space repeatedly during note input.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a barline. If you want to input a barline on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want to input barlines onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Press Shift-B to open the bars and barlines popover. 4. Enter the barline you want into the popover.
Write mode Notations input Inputting barlines with the panel You can input barlines using the Bars and Barlines panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. You can also change the type of existing barlines. NOTE These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. PREREQUISITE If you want to input barlines onto single staves only, you have input an independent time signature on those staves. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input Repeats in playback on page 464 Input methods for dynamics You can input dynamics with the keyboard by using the dynamics popover, and with the mouse by using the Dynamics panel.
Write mode Notations input Dynamic or modifier Popover entry possibile possibile, poss, or poss. poco poco molto molto più piu or più meno meno mosso mosso crescendo: < cresc. (text) cresc diminuendo: > dim.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Dynamics on page 628 Dynamic modifiers on page 639 Niente hairpins on page 637 Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics on page 634 Changing the appearance of gradual dynamics on page 643 Dynamics panel The Dynamics panel contains the different dynamics available in Dorico Elements, including gradual dynamics and dynamic modifiers, such as poco and possibile. ● You can hide/show the Dynamics panel by clicking Dynamics the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Notations input independently in multiple-voice contexts, for example, to give the separate staves of grand staff instruments different dynamics. TIP You can also change dynamics during note input by following these steps when the caret is at the rhythmic position of the dynamic you want to change. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. NOTE If you want to input voice-specific dynamics, the caret must be active.
Write mode Notations input NOTE ● If you entered a dynamic phrase into the popover during note input, such as pp, each dynamic and hairpin lasts a quarter note (crotchet) by default. You can lengthen/shorten gradual dynamics and groups of dynamics later. ● Some modifiers, such as molto, appear before immediate dynamics rather than after them, even if you do not enter them in that order. This follows the generally accepted practice for the placement of that text.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input dynamics. If you want to input dynamics across a duration, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Dynamics to show the Dynamics panel. 3. Input the dynamics you want in one of the following ways: ● To input dynamics for all voices/staves belonging to the instrument, click them in the Dynamics panel.
Write mode Notations input Hiding/Showing combined dynamic separators on page 634 Changing dynamic levels on page 633 Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics on page 634 Mouse input settings on page 154 Input methods for chord symbols You can input chord symbols in Dorico Elements with the computer keyboard and any connected MIDI keyboard.
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol roots Type of chord symbol root Popover entry English note names C, Db, F#, B, and so on C, D♭, F♯, B, and so on German note names C, Des, Fis, H, and so on C, D♭, F♯, H, and so on Fixed-do solfège do, reb, fa, fa#, ti, and so on C, D♭, F, F♯, B, and so on Nashville numbers representing scale degrees 1, 2b, 4#, 7, and so on Assuming C major: C, D♭, F♯, B, and so on Chord symbol qualities Chord symbol quality Popover entry Major maj, M, ma, or nothing af
Write mode Notations input Chord symbol alterations Type of chord symbol alteration Popover entry Alterations b5, -5, #9, +9, and so on Added notes add#11, add+11, addb9, add-9, addF#, addBb, and so on Suspensions sus4, sus9, and so on Omissions omit3, no7, and so on Chord symbols with altered bass notes Example altered bass note chord symbols Popover entry G7/D G7,D or Gmaj7,D C(♭5)/E♭ CMb5/Eb or Cmajb5/Eb Fm/D♯ Fm/D# or Fmi/D# Polychord chord symbols Example polychord chord symbols Pop
Write mode Notations input Modal chord symbol Popover entry Dorian dorian Phrygian phrygian Lydian lydian Mixolydian mixolydian Aeolian aeolian Locrian locrian Melodic minor melodicminor Harmonic minor harmonicminor Whole tone wholetone Octatonic or diminished half-whole diminishedhalfwhole, diminishedsemitonetone, octatonichalfwhole, or octatonicsemitonetone Octatonic or diminished whole-half diminishedwholehalf, diminishedtonesemitone, octatonicwholehalf, or octatonictonesemitone
Write mode Notations input Popover navigation Key command Advance the popover to the next beat. Space Move the popover back to the previous beat. Shift-Space Advance the popover to the start of the next bar. Tab Move the popover back to the start of the previous bar.
Write mode Notations input NOTE If you selected an item on a staff that has local chord symbols at earlier rhythmic positions, the chord symbols popover is automatically set to input local chord symbols when it opens. 3. Optional: Change the type of chord symbol you want to enter in one of the following ways: ● To input local chord symbols, press Alt/Opt-L . ● To input global chord symbols, press Alt/Opt-G . The popover icon updates to show the current type. 4. 5.
Write mode Notations input Hiding/Showing chord symbols in layouts on page 601 Hiding/Showing chord diagrams on page 609 Disabling MIDI input devices on page 209 Inputting polychord chord symbols Polychord chord symbols indicate that multiple different chords, commonly two, are played simultaneously. You can input polychords when inputting chord symbols with a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, open the chord symbols popover. 2. Play the first chord of the polychord with one hand.
Write mode Notations input Indicating altered bass notes in chord symbols You can indicate that chords have altered bass notes when inputting chord symbols with a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, open the chord symbols popover. 2. Indicate which note is the altered bass note of a chord in any of the following ways on your MIDI keyboard: ● Play all notes of the chord together with the altered bass note at the bottom.
Write mode Notations input Octave lines on page 622 Clefs and octave lines popover The following tables contain the entries for the clefs and octave lines popover that you can use to input the different clefs and octave lines available. You can open the clefs and octave lines popover in Write mode in any of the following ways when either an item is selected or the caret is active: ● Press Shift-C . ● Select an existing clef or octave line and press Return . ● Choose Write > Create Clef.
Write mode Notations input Octave lines Function of octave line Popover entry Shifts notes up by 1 octave. 8va, 8, 8u, or 1u Shifts notes up by 2 octaves. 15ma, 15, 15u, or 2u Shifts notes up by 3 octaves. 22ma, 22, 22u, or 3u Shifts notes down by 1 octave. 8ba, 8vb, 8d, or 1d Shifts notes down by 2 octaves. 15ba, 15vb, 15d, or 2d Shifts notes down by 3 octaves.
Write mode Notations input ● Many instruments in Dorico Elements have different types that show alternative clefs by default. You can select the appropriate instrument type from the instrument picker when adding or changing instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a clef. 2. Optional: If you want to input clefs onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves.
Write mode Notations input ● Start note input. ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a clef. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Clefs to show the Clefs panel. 3. In the Clefs panel, click the clef you want. RESULT During note input, clefs are input at the caret position. Note input continues after inputting the clef, so you can continue inputting notes and clefs as required.
Write mode Notations input When adding octave lines to existing music, they are input either above or below your selection, depending on whether the octave line indicates that notes are played higher or lower than notated. The pitches of notes within octave lines are adjusted automatically. For example, notes within octave above lines appear an octave lower than they do without the octave above line. TIP You can also lengthen/shorten octave lines after they have been input.
Write mode Notations input TIP You can also lengthen/shorten octave lines after they have been input. RELATED LINKS Octave lines on page 622 Lengthening/Shortening octave lines on page 623 Mouse input settings on page 154 Input methods for holds and pauses You can input holds and pauses with the keyboard by using the holds and pauses popover in Write mode, and with the mouse by using the Holds and Pauses panel.
Write mode Notations input Type of hold or pause Popover entry Long fermata (Henze) fermatalonghenze Curlew (Britten) curlew Caesura caesura or // Thick caesura caesurathick Curved caesura caesuracurved Short caesura caesurashort Breath mark (Comma-like) breathmarkcomma, comma, or , (comma) Breath mark (Tick-like) breathmarktick Breath mark (Upbow-like) breathmarkupbow Breath mark (Salzedo) breathmarksalzedo NOTE The Curlew mark was originally devised by Benjamin Britten for “Curlew R
Write mode Notations input NOTE Holds and pauses do not currently have an effect in playback, but this is planned for future versions. Inputting holds and pauses with the popover You can input holds and pauses using the holds and pauses popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a hold or pause.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a hold or pause. If you want to input a breath mark on a specific staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. NOTE You can only input one hold or pause at a time. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Holds and Pauses 3. In the Holds and Pauses panel, click the hold or pause you want. to show the Holds and Pauses panel.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Holds and pauses on page 687 Types of caesuras on page 689 Input methods for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations You can input ornaments, including arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations with the keyboard by using the ornaments popover, and with the mouse by using the Ornaments panel.
Write mode Notations input Type of ornament Popover entry Short trill: shorttr Mordent: mor or mordent Turn: turn Inverted turn: invturn or invertedturn Trill intervals Trill interval Popover entry Major second/Whole step tr 2 or tr M2 Minor third tr m3 Perfect fifth tr p5 Augmented fourth tr aug4 Diminished fifth tr dim5 This list is not comprehensive, as there are many possible trill intervals.
Write mode Notations input Type of jazz articulation Popover entry Scoop scoop Doit (bend) doit Doit (smooth) doitsmooth Fall (bend) fall Fall (smooth) fallsmooth TIP Other ornaments are available in the Ornaments panel on the right of the window in Write mode. You can specify the type/length of jazz articulations when using the Ornaments panel but not when using the ornaments popover.
Write mode Notations input Type of guitar technique Popover entry Vibrato bar scoop vibscoop Vibrato bar dip vibdip Vibrato bar line wbar or w/bar NOTE Must have duration to show its line. Hammer-on ho or hammer NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with ascending pitch directions, such as C-D. Pull-off po or pull NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C.
Write mode Notations input Type of guitar technique Popover entry Left-hand tapping with pull-off lhtappull NOTE You must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with descending pitch directions, such as D-C.
Write mode Notations input Arpeggiation Contains the different types of arpeggio signs. NOTE You cannot input arpeggio signs with the mouse during note input. Glissandi Contains the different types of glissando lines. Guitar Contains techniques and pitch alterations commonly associated with guitars, such as guitar bends and vibrato bar scoops.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Ornaments on page 741 Trills on page 744 Trill intervals on page 748 Changing trill intervals on page 749 Changing trill intervals partway through trills on page 750 Trill interval appearance on page 752 Jazz ornaments on page 787 Inputting notes on page 161 Inputting jazz articulations with the popover on page 276 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 161 Inputting ornaments/trills with the panel You can input ornaments, trills, and jazz ornaments using th
Write mode Notations input Inputting arpeggio signs with the popover You can input arpeggio signs using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. You can also input arpeggio signs across notes in multiple voices and on different staves that belong to the same instrument, such as piano or harp. NOTE You can only input one arpeggio sign at a time. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input Inputting arpeggio signs with the panel You can input arpeggio signs on existing notes using the Ornaments panel. You can also input arpeggio signs across notes in multiple voices and on different staves that belong to the same instrument, such as piano or harp. NOTE ● You can only input one arpeggio sign at a time, and you cannot input arpeggio signs with the mouse during note input.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a glissando line. For example, select a grace note and a normal note, two notes in different voices, or two notes on different staves belonging to the same instrument. 2. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 3. Enter the appropriate entry for the glissando line you want into the popover. 4. ● Enter gliss for a straight glissando line. ● Enter glisswavy for a wavy glissando line.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a glissando line. For example, select a grace note and a normal note, two notes in different voices, or two notes on different staves belonging to the same instrument. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments 3. In the Glissandi section, click the style of glissando line you want. ● Glissando (Straight) ● Glissando (Wavy) to show the Ornaments panel.
Write mode Notations input ● Select the notes to which you want to add jazz articulations. 2. Optional: If you want to input jazz articulations onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 5. Enter the appropriate entry for the jazz articulation you want into the popover. For example, enter scoop for a scoop or fall for a fall. 6. Press Return to close the popover.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add jazz articulations. 2. Optional: If you want to input jazz articulations onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments 5.
Write mode Notations input Inputting guitar bends with the popover You can input guitar bends between existing notes, including between grace notes and normal notes, using the ornaments popover. You can input guitar bends between both adjacent and non-adjacent notes. NOTE You cannot input guitar bends during note input or on the last note on a staff. PREREQUISITE You have input at least two notes that you want to join with a guitar bend. PROCEDURE 1.
Write mode Notations input ● You cannot input guitar bends during note input or on the last note on a staff. PREREQUISITE You have input at least two notes that you want to join with a guitar bend. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a guitar bend. For example, select a grace note and a normal note or two notes in different voices. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments 3. In the Guitar section, click Guitar Bend to show the Ornaments panel. .
Write mode Notations input Inputting guitar post-bends You can input guitar post-bends on any existing notes belonging to fretted instruments. You can also specify that post-bends are microtonal. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes after which you want to input guitar post-bends. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Post-bend interval in the Guitar Post-bends group. 3. Do one of the following: ● Change the interval as required.
Write mode Notations input 10. Press Return to close the popover. 11. Optional: During note input, input a note or press Space to advance the caret and input the vibrato bar indication. RESULT The smooth fall jazz articulation is input on all selected notes. During note input, this is usually the last note you input. During note input, vibrato bar indications are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a vibrato bar dive. NOTE The notes must be on the same staff and have a descending pitch direction, such as D-C. 2. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 3. Enter vibbend into the popover to input the dive. 4. Press Return to close the popover. 5. Select the two notes you want to join with a vibrato bar return.
Write mode Notations input PREREQUISITE You have input at least three notes with alternating pitch directions, such as D-C-D, that you want to join with a vibrato bar dive and return. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the two notes you want to join with a vibrato bar dive. NOTE The notes must be on the same staff and have a descending pitch direction, such as D-C. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments 3. In the Guitar section, click Guitar Bend with Vibrato Bar 4.
Write mode Notations input 2. Optional: If you want to input vibrato bar scoops onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Optional: During note input, input at least one note. 4. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 5. Enter vibscoop into the popover. 6. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT Vibrato bar scoops are input on the selected notes. During note input, this is usually the last note you input.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can input vibrato bar indications to clarify the vibrato bar scoops should be played using the vibrato bar.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff at the rhythmic position where you want to input a vibrato bar dip. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Ornaments to show the Ornaments panel. 3. In the Guitar section, click Vibrato Bar Dip . RESULT During note input, vibrato bar dips are input at the caret position. When adding vibrato bar dips to existing music, they are input at the position of the earliest selected item.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Ornaments popover on page 266 Vibrato bar techniques on page 778 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 161 Lengthening/Shortening vibrato bar indications/lines on page 784 Playing technique duration on page 819 Inputting vibrato bar indications/lines with the panel You can input vibrato bar indications/lines using the Ornaments panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the notes to which you want to add hammer-ons/pull-offs. NOTE ● If you want to input hammer-ons, you must select at least two notes assigned to the same string with ascending pitch directions, such as C-D.
Write mode Notations input Inputting tapping You can input right-hand and left-hand tapping indications on any notes belonging to fretted instruments using the ornaments popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes. You can also add tapping with hammer-ons/pull-offs to existing notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams You can input playing techniques with the keyboard by using the playing techniques popover, and with the mouse by using the Playing Techniques panel. Pedal lines are considered playing techniques in Dorico Elements because both affect the sound that the instrument produces.
Write mode Notations input Playing techniques Playing technique Popover entry Vibrato vibrato Senza vibrato senza vibrato Naturale (nat.) nat Con sord.
Write mode Notations input Playing technique Popover entry Strum up strum up Strum down strum down Left hand lh Right hand rh This list is not comprehensive as there are many valid playing techniques. It is intended to illustrate how you can structure your entry to input different types of common playing techniques. If you do not know the correct entry for a playing technique, start entering part of the playing technique and see if it becomes available in the popover menu.
Write mode Notations input Harp pedaling Example harp pedaling Popover entry D, C, Bb, Eb, F, G, A DCBbEbFGA, BbEb, or --^|^--- D, C♯, B, E, F♯, G♯, A DC#BEF#G#A, C#F#G#, or -v-|-vv- TIP The pipe character is optional.
Write mode Notations input Brass Contains playing techniques typically only used for brass instruments, such as “cup mute” and “stopped”. Unpitched Percussion Contains playing techniques typically only used for unpitched percussion instruments, such as “rim” and “scrape”. Pitched Percussion Contains playing techniques typically only used for pitched percussion instruments, such as “motor on” and “½ Ped.” for vibraphones.
Write mode Notations input 3. Press Shift-P to open the playing techniques popover. 4. Enter the appropriate entry for the playing technique you want into the popover. For example, enter pizz or non vibrato->. When you start entering a playing technique into the playing techniques popover, a menu appears that shows valid playing techniques containing the letters/words you enter, which you can select. If you want the playing technique to have duration, you can add -> at the end. 5.
Write mode Notations input Groups of playing techniques on page 821 Playing technique continuation lines on page 818 Hiding/Showing playing technique duration lines on page 820 Extending the caret to multiple staves on page 161 Enabling independent voice playback on page 460 Playback techniques on page 512 Inputting playing techniques with the panel You can input playing techniques using the Playing Techniques panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Changing your mouse input settings on page 155 Grouping playing techniques together on page 821 Enabling independent voice playback on page 460 Playback techniques on page 512 Inputting pedal lines and retakes with the popover You can input pedal lines using the playing techniques popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music.
Write mode Notations input PREREQUISITE You have input a sustain pedal line. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item at the rhythmic position where you want the retake to apply. 2. Press Shift-P to open the playing techniques popover. 3. Enter ^ or retake into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The retake is input at the selected rhythmic position.
Write mode Notations input Adding retakes to existing pedal lines with the panel You can add retakes to existing sustain pedal lines using the Playing Techniques panel. NOTE You cannot add retakes to sostenuto or una corda pedal lines. PREREQUISITE You have input a sustain pedal line. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item at the rhythmic position where you want the retake to apply. 2.
Write mode Notations input 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The corresponding harp pedal diagram is input at the selected rhythmic position. Depending on your per-layout settings, it is either displayed as a diagram, using note names, or not shown and instead indicated by a signpost. During note input, harp pedal diagrams are input at the caret position.
Write mode Notations input ● Select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to input a string indicator outside the staff. If you want to input a string indicator with a duration line, select items on the staff that span that duration. 2. Optional: If you want to input string indicators onto multiple staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3. Press Shift-P to open the playing techniques popover. 4.
Write mode Notations input ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. If you want to input the same string indicator in multiple places, change your mouse input preference to Load pointer with item so that you do not have to reselect the string indicator for each note. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes belonging to fretted instruments beside which you want to show string indicators. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show in the String Indicators group. RESULT String indicators are shown in the staff beside each selected note. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Write mode Notations input Lines panel The Lines panel contains the different types of lines available in Dorico Elements. It is located on the right of the window in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Lines panel by clicking Lines of the window in Write mode. in the Notations toolbox on the right You can also hide/show the panel whose icon is currently selected in the Notations toolbox by pressing Ctrl/Cmd-9 or clicking the disclosure arrow on the right of the window.
Write mode Notations input ● If you want to input barline-/rhythmic position-attached lines, select items that span the required duration of the line. ● If you want to input horizontal lines that are attached to noteheads at one end but are attached to barlines/rhythmic positions at the other end, select the required note and any item at the required rhythmic position of the other end. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Lines 3.
Write mode Notations input ● These steps describe inputting with the default mouse input preference Create item at selection. You cannot create cross-staff and cross-voice vertical lines if your preference is set to Load pointer with item. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select at least one note at the same rhythmic position in each voice to which you want to add a vertical line.
Write mode Notations input 2. Open the text editor in any of the following ways: ● To input staff text, press Shift-X or click Text in the Notations toolbox. ● To input staff text with a specific paragraph style, choose Write > Create Text > [Paragraph style]. ● To input system text, press Shift-Alt/Opt-X . ● To input system text with a specific paragraph style, choose Write > Create System Text > [Paragraph style]. 3. Enter the text you want. 4. Optional: Press Return to insert a line break.
Write mode Notations input Allows you to change the paragraph style applied to the whole paragraph, which can change the appearance, formatting, and alignment of the text. Staff text and system text are always treated as single paragraphs. 3 Font Allows you to change the font family of selected text. 4 Font Style Allows you to change the font style of selected text. NOTE 5 ● Depending on the font selected, some font styles might not be available.
Write mode Notations input ● Overline ● Strikethrough 12 Script Types Allows you to position selected text in one of the following positions relative to the text on the baseline: ● Superscript ● Subscript 13 Foreground Color Allows you to change the color of selected text. 14 Background Color Allows you to change the background color of selected text.
Write mode Notations input 4. 5. Enter the word or syllable you want to add to the selected note into the popover. ● To enter multiple words on a single note, press Shift-Alt/Opt-Space . ● To include a hyphen within a single word or syllable, press Alt/Opt-- (hyphen). ● To include an elision in a lyric, press _ (underscore). Advance the popover to the next note in one of the following ways: ● If you entered a complete word, or the final syllable in a multi-syllabic word, press Space .
Write mode Notations input ● Choose Write > Create Lyrics. ● Click Lyrics in the Notations toolbox. Lyric lines The popover automatically opens ready to input lyrics into Line 1, except if you are changing an existing lyric. The number shown on the left-hand side of the lyrics popover indicates the lyric line into which the lyric is input. The lyrics popover with an example entry for Line 1 You can change the lyric line number by pressing Down Arrow when the lyrics popover is open.
Write mode Notations input Navigation during lyric input You can move the lyrics popover to input new lyrics and edit existing lyrics without having to close and reopen the lyrics popover. Popover navigation Key command Finish the current word and advance the popover to the next note or chord. Space Finish the current syllable and advance the popover to the next note or chord. - (hyphen) Advance the popover to the next note without showing an extension line or hyphen.
Write mode Notations input ● To input local figures, press Alt/Opt-L . ● To input global figures, press Alt/Opt-G . The popover icon updates to show the current type. 4. Figured bass popover when inputting a global Figured bass popover when inputting a local figure figure Enter the figure you want into the figured bass popover. For example, enter 4->3d=4r=2 for a 4-3 suspension that lasts a whole note, with the resolution to the third after a half note.
Write mode Notations input RELATED LINKS Figured bass on page 651 Lengthening/Shortening figured bass figures on page 654 Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts on page 652 Simplifying figured bass compound intervals on page 658 Showing figured bass on rests on page 653 Fixing the current appearance of figured bass on page 658 Resetting figured bass on page 659 Figured bass popover The following tables contain examples of what you can enter into the figured bass popover to input the different possible figu
Write mode Notations input Type of figure Example popover entry Hide figures <3> or {3} Suspensions 4->3, 4_3, or 4~3 Suspension duration r=2 (number of quarter notes) or r=1/2n (fraction of bass note duration) Hold and suspension durations both specified 4->3d=4r=2, 4->3,d=4,r=2, 4->3d=1nr=1/2n, or 4->3,d=1n,r=1/2n In this example, the hold duration is a whole note, the suspension duration is a half note, and the bass note at this position is a whole note.
Write mode Notations input Type of accidental/alteration Popover entry Double sharp x, ##, or ds Triple sharp x#, #x, ###, or ts Double flat bb or db Triple flat bbb or tb Raise figure by a half-step (semitone) + Lower figure by a half-step (semitone) - Diminished figure d Unaltered figure u RELATED LINKS Chord symbols popover on page 249 Inputting rehearsal marks You can input rehearsal marks with the mouse and the keyboard.
Write mode Notations input AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want to change the letter/number displayed in the rehearsal mark, you can change its index and/or sequence type. RELATED LINKS Rehearsal marks on page 839 Changing the index of rehearsal marks on page 841 Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type on page 842 Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks on page 842 Mouse input settings on page 154 Inputting markers/timecodes You can input markers at specific positions in time.
Write mode Notations input The Add Marker dialog contains the following options: Text Allows you to enter custom text that is shown in the marker. Timecode Allows you to specify the timecode at which you want to input the marker. For example, if you already know the timecodes for each marker, you can enter them directly rather than positioning the playhead at the position of each marker. Valid range Displays the timecode range of the flow.
Write mode Notations input Find Tempo dialog The Find Tempo dialog allows you to calculate tempos that best accommodate your important markers, for example, by identifying which tempos cause markers to coincide as closely as possible with strong beats. ● You can open the Find Tempo dialog in Write mode by clicking Find Tempo in the Markers section of the Video panel. NOTE ● The Find Tempo dialog only considers markers in a single flow.
Write mode Notations input Tempos found Contains a list of possible tempos that you can select to see how they affect the position of your markers relative to beats. The list is updated automatically when you change options such as Tempo range and Beat unit. The list contains columns for the following information: ● BPM: Stands for “beats per minute”. Lists different possible tempos according to their metronome mark value. ● IFO: Stands for “important frames off”.
Write mode Notations input TIP To indicate repeats using repeat barlines, you can input repeat barlines using the available input methods for barlines.
Write mode Notations input Type of repeat marker Popover entry D.C. al Fine dcalf, DC al Fine, D.C. al Fine, and so on D.C. al Coda dcalc, DC al Coda, D.C. al Coda, and so on D.S. ds, D.S., dal segno, and so on D.S. al Fine dsalf, DS al Fine, D.S. al Fine, and so on D.S. al Coda dsalc, DS al Coda, D.S.
Write mode Notations input Type of tremolo Popover entry Three strokes ///2, \\\2, or 32 Four strokes ////2, \\\\2, or 42 Z on stem (buzz roll) z or zonstem Remove all tremolos 0 or clear Slash regions Slash region Popover entry New slash region slash Bar repeats Type of bar repeat Popover entry Repeat last bar % or %1 Repeat last 2 bars %2 Repeat last 4 bars %4 Repeat last bar, group in 2 %1,2 Repeat last bar, group in 4 %1,4 Repeat last 2 bars, group in 2 %2,2 Repeat last 4 ba
Write mode Notations input Repeat Structures panel The Repeat Structures panel contains the different types of repeat notations, including repeat endings, repeat markers, tremolos, rhythm slashes, and bar repeats. Tremolos are included in the Repeat Structures panel because they indicate that notes are repeated, either individually as single-note tremolos or in sequences as multi-note tremolos.
Write mode Notations input RESULT The repeat ending is input, with the first ending segment covering the bars in which you selected items, and a second ending segment created automatically in the following bar. An end repeat barline is created at the end of the first ending if none exists already.
Write mode Notations input EXAMPLE Default repeat ending structure with two endings Repeat ending structure with additional third ending RELATED LINKS Repeat endings on page 853 Repeats popover on page 322 Inputting repeat endings with the panel You can input repeat endings using the Repeat Structures panel, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input.
Write mode Notations input TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow . ● Select the bars that you want to include in the additional ending. NOTE Your selection must start from the first bar following the previous repeat ending segment. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Repeat Structures 3.
Write mode Notations input Inputting repeat markers with the popover You can input repeat markers, including repeat jumps and repeat sections, using the repeats popover, both during note input and by adding them to existing music. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, do one of the following: ● Start note input. TIP During note input, you can select additional notes before/after the last input note without deactivating the caret by pressing Shift-Right Arrow / Shift-Left Arrow .
Write mode Notations input For repeat jumps, we recommend that you select the barline with which you want the end of the jump instruction to align. For repeat sections, we recommend that you select the barline with which you want the start of the section marker to align. 2. In the Notations toolbox, click Repeat Structures 3. Click the repeat marker you want to input in any of the following sections: ● Repeat Jumps ● Repeat Sections to show the Repeat Structures panel.
Write mode Notations input RESULT Single-note tremolos are input on the selected notes with the number of tremolo strokes specified. Multi-note tremolos with the number of tremolo strokes specified are input between selected individual notes and the notes immediately after them, or between selected pairs of notes. When tuplets are selected, multi-note tremolos are input across the selected tuplets, with the tremolo strokes positioned in the center of all notes in the tuplet.
Write mode Notations input For example, click Two Strokes Single-note Tremolo to input single-note tremolos with two strokes or click Three Strokes Multi-note Tremolo to input multi-note tremolos with three strokes. RESULT Single-note tremolos are input on the selected notes with the number of tremolo strokes specified. Multi-note tremolos with the number of tremolo strokes specified are input between selected individual notes and the notes immediately after them, or between selected pairs of notes.
Write mode Notations input TIP You can also input slash regions by clicking Create Slash Region in the Rhythm Slashes group of the Repeat Structures panel. RELATED LINKS Repeats popover on page 322 Rhythm slashes on page 869 Slash regions on page 869 Slash voices on page 1001 Inputting bar repeats You can input bar repeat regions when at least one bar before the region contains notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the bars on a single staff that you want to show as a bar repeat.
Write mode Editing and selecting Editing and selecting In Dorico Elements, there are multiple different ways you can select and edit the items in your project, from selecting items individually to making large selections covering multiple staves.
Write mode Editing and selecting TIP You can select notes and items on multiple staves and in specific voices, for example, if you only want to select notes in up-stem voices on four staves. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A to expand your selection. 3. Optional: Continue pressing Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A to extend your selection further.
Write mode Editing and selecting RELATED LINKS Status bar on page 32 Selection tools on page 33 Large selections You can make large selections, including selecting the contents of whole staves or the whole flow. Select everything in a specific area You can use the Marquee Tool to specify an area in which you want to select everything. Select everything in the whole flow ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-A . ● Choose Edit > Select All.
Write mode Editing and selecting TIP If you want to select only a certain type of item, such as lyrics or dynamics, you can then use the corresponding filters. RELATED LINKS Filters on page 340 Selecting/Deselecting notes and items individually on page 334 Selecting more items of the same type on page 334 System track The system track is a translucent line above the top of each system in Write mode. It allows you to add and delete bars and beats, and to select everything on all staves in the system.
Write mode Editing and selecting Allows you to select all items, including system objects, on all staves in the system across the selected region. 3 Add Allows you to add bars or beats of the same duration as the selection in the system track. The extra time is inserted immediately after the end of the selection. NOTE Selections on the system track are cleared whenever you make any other kind of selection, or when you switch layouts.
Write mode Editing and selecting ● 3. Click and drag to the right/left along the system track. Click System Track Select in the system track. It can also appear above the system track if your selection is narrow. System Track Select button in the system track The System Track Select button appears filled in when you hover over it RESULT Everything on all staves in the selected bars is selected and highlighted, including system objects, notations, and signposts.
Write mode Editing and selecting RESULT Everything on all staves in the selected beats is selected and highlighted, including system objects, notations, and signposts. NOTE If you then delete your selection, any signposts included are also deleted. This can affect the page layout, for example, by removing ossia staves whose signposts were included in the selection.
Write mode Editing and selecting Changing filters to select/deselect You can change whether the available filter options select or deselect the specified items. By default, filters select items, meaning that the resulting selection only includes the item being filtered. When filters are set to deselect, the resulting selection includes everything except the item being filtered.
Write mode Editing and selecting Playing all/individual notes in chords during note input/selection You can change your default setting for whether all notes in chords are played when you select any note in the chord or whether only the selected notes are played. PREREQUISITE Notes are played during note input/selection. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click Note Input and Editing in the category list. 3.
Write mode Editing and selecting 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The selected item is changed according to the new entry in the popover. This changes different parameters for different items, such as the duration of a hold or pause or the volume of a dynamic. NOTE ● If you change a fermata to a breath mark, only the fermata on the top staff is changed to a breath mark.
Write mode Editing and selecting Deactivating these properties resets items to their default placement. NOTE If you flipped multiple multi-segment slurs or tuplet brackets with different hook directions at the same time, all selected items are set to either above or below the staff, unless they all originally had compatible directions set. RELATED LINKS Local vs.
Write mode Navigation Hiding non-printing elements You can temporarily hide all visible elements that do not print, such as signposts and selection highlights. This allows you to view the current layout as it will appear when printed/exported without switching to Print mode. PROCEDURE ● Press and hold \ (Windows) or ` (macOS) . RESULT All non-printing elements in the current layout are hidden until you release the key command. Printing elements appear as they will when printed/exported.
Write mode Navigation ● If you want to navigate through a particular type of item, such as rehearsal marks, select an item of that type. NOTE You can only navigate forwards/backwards through items on the same staff. You cannot navigate to other items of the same type on other staves. 2. Navigate to other notes or items in any of the following ways: ● To navigate to the next item or note in the same voice, press Right Arrow .
Write mode Navigation PROCEDURE ● Go to a different flow in one of the following ways: ● To go to the previous flow in the layout, choose Edit > Go To > Go To Previous Flow. ● To go to the next flow in the layout, choose Edit > Go To > Go To Next Flow. RESULT The music area updates to show the start of the corresponding flow. Dorico Elements automatically positions the top staff towards the top left of the music area.
Write mode Navigation 4. Click OK. RESULT The music area updates to show the corresponding bar. Dorico Elements automatically positions the top staff towards the top left of the music area. In Play mode, the playhead moves to the start of the corresponding bar. Dorico Elements automatically positions the playhead at the start of the ruler. Dragging pages in the music area You can drag pages in the music area in Write mode to bring other parts of your music into view, including in galley view.
Write mode Signposts RESULT The zoom level in the music area is changed. If you had anything selected, Dorico Elements uses your selection as the focal point of the zoom. If you had nothing selected, Dorico Elements focuses on the area previously in the center of the view.
Write mode Arranging tools Hiding/Showing signposts You can hide/show all signposts or only hide/show signposts for specific items at any time in Setup mode and Write mode. PROCEDURE ● Hide/Show signposts in any of the following ways: ● To hide/show all signposts, choose View > Signposts > Hide Signposts. ● To hide/show signposts for specific items, choose View > Signposts > [Type of item].
Write mode Arranging tools Any repeat barlines input as part of repeat endings are not deleted automatically when you delete repeat endings. TIP You can also delete markers by selecting them in the Markers section of the Video panel and clicking Delete in the action bar.
Write mode Arranging tools Copying and pasting items to multiple staves You can copy and paste notes and other items to multiple staves at once, for example, to copy a single phrase to all the woodwind staves when they are playing in unison. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the items you want to copy to multiple staves. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-C to copy the selected items. 3. Select an item on each staff to which you want to paste the selected items. 4. Press Ctrl/Cmd-V to paste the selected items.
Write mode Arranging tools Moving notes to other staves You can move notes to other staves of any type, for example, if you want to move individual notes from one keyboard staff to another after importing a keyboard part from a MIDI file. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes you want to move to another staff. 2. Move the notes to another staff in one of the following ways: ● To move notes to the staff above, press Alt/Opt-N . ● To move notes to the staff below, press Alt/Opt-M .
Write mode Arranging tools ● Choose Edit > Voices > Change Voice > [Voice]. ● Choose Edit > Voices > Change Voice > [Slash Voice]. TIP ● You can also choose these options from the context menu. ● If there is only one voice on the staff, you can create a new voice for your selected notes.
Write mode Splitting flows EXAMPLE An E is in the up-stem voice, an F in the down-stem voice. After swapping their voice contents, the E is in the down-stem voice, and the F is in the up-stem voice. RELATED LINKS Swapping the order of voices on page 999 Voice column index on page 999 Splitting flows You can split flows at specific rhythmic positions. Flows in Dorico Elements are independent of each other, meaning they can contain different players and have different time signatures and key signatures.
Write mode Comments Comments Comments allow you to add notes or instructions at precise positions in your project without affecting the music. They are considered annotations in Dorico Elements, meaning they are not printed by default. Comments exist outside of the music, so they do not affect note spacing, vertical spacing, or casting off. However, you can attach them to specific items and staves in order to show the precise subject of each comment.
Write mode Comments Changing the author name used for comments on page 361 Annotations on page 537 Adding comments You can add comments at any rhythmic position in your project, including adding different comments to multiple staves at the same rhythmic position. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select an item on the staff and at the rhythmic position where you want to add a comment. If you want your comment to apply to a range, select multiple items. 2. Press Alt/Opt-C to open the Comment dialog. 3.
Write mode Comments Comments panel The Comments panel shows all the comments in the current flow as a list. Replies to comments are indented to indicate their relationship to the original comment. The Comments panel is located on the right of the window in Write mode. ● You can hide/show the Comments panel by clicking Comments on the right of the window in Write mode.
Write mode Comments 1 Author name This uses either the current user account or a custom name, depending on the preference that was set when the comment was added. 2 Comment content 3 Date the comment was added to the project 4 Instrument to which the comment applies 5 Bars to which the comment applies The action bar at the bottom of the panel contains the following options: Create Comment Adds a comment to the selected rhythmic position and staff.
Write mode Comments Replying to comments You can add replies to existing comments, which is useful when co-ordinating with others as this organizes the list of comments in the Comments panel into clear sections. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the comment to which you want to reply. You can do this in the music area and in the Comments panel. 2. Press Alt/Opt-R to open the Comment dialog. 3. Enter your reply into the dialog. 4. Click OK to close the dialog and add the reply.
Write mode Comments Changing the author name used for comments You can change the author name used for comments to either your user account name or a custom name. This affects subsequent comments you add to the project without changing the author name used for existing comments. For the custom name, you can specify both the full name that is shown in the Comments panel and the initials shown in the music area. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-, to open Preferences. 2. Click General in the category list. 3.
Write mode Comments PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Comments. RESULT Comments are shown in the music as speech bubbles when a tick appears beside Comments in the menu, and hidden when no tick appears. 362 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Layout and formatting There are various ways you can control the layout and formatting of pages in your project, including changing the size of pages and adjusting note spacing. NOTE In Dorico Elements, you cannot edit all the objects and settings used to determine page formatting, such as frames and master pages. However, we have included basic information about these for your information.
Layout and formatting Flow headings If you want to change the information shown at the tops of pages, that is, the title and running header text that you cannot select, we recommend that you do so in the Project Info dialog to avoid master page overrides. The big title at the top of the first page is the project title, and the running header on subsequent pages uses the flow title for the top flow on that page.
Layout and formatting Frames A flow heading above the third flow in a part layout NOTE Changing individual flow headings in layouts is considered a master page override in Dorico Elements. This includes, for example, deleting a token from a flow heading. Pages with master page overrides are not automatically deleted, even if they are empty because the layout became shorter.
Layout and formatting Music frame chains A graphics frame with image loaded EXAMPLE The first page of a piano piece. It contains a music frame, text frames for the title, dedication, and composer, a flow heading frame inside the top of the music frame, and graphics frames in the top corners.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Page formatting The formatting of pages in Dorico Elements is determined by a number of factors, including the layout’s staff size, page margins, the master page applied to them, any casting off values applied to them, system and frame breaks, and frame padding. The most important factors that determine how pages are formatted in Dorico Elements are: Staff size Staff size refers to the distance between the top and bottom lines of staves.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Music frame margins Music frames have margins at the top and bottom. Music frame margins provide padding to ensure that musical material displayed within the frame remains on the page. For example, if music frames have no padding, the top line on the top staff in the frame is positioned at the top of the frame. Any notes that require ledger lines above the staff might then be positioned off the top of the page. You can change the music frame margins for each layout.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 7. Optional: Repeat steps 2 to 6 for other layouts whose page size/orientation you want to change. 8. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The page size and/or orientation is changed for all the selected layouts. NOTE Changing the page size of layouts might not change the paper size automatically selected for those layouts in the Print Options panel in Print mode.
Layout and formatting Page formatting RESULT The page margins in the selected layouts are changed.
Layout and formatting Page formatting By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4. In the Space Size section, select the staff size you want from the Rastral size menu.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 4. In the Ideal Gaps section, change the values for the different contexts as required. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The minimum gaps between staves and systems in the corresponding contexts are changed. This affects how much space Dorico Elements allows for staves/systems in its casting off estimations and whether frames are considered full enough to justify vertically automatically.
Layout and formatting Page formatting EXAMPLE A page with staves and systems both justified The same page with only systems justified RELATED LINKS Per-layout vertical spacing options on page 408 Changing the default staff/system spacing on page 371 Hiding/Showing blank staves after final flows on page 375 Hiding/Showing empty staves You can hide/show empty staves differently in each layout independently.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 6. Optional: For Players excluded from Hide Empty Staves, activate the checkbox for each instrument you want to be shown regardless of your choice for Hide empty staves. 7. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Empty staves in the selected layouts are hidden/shown according to your choice.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Manual Staff Visibility dialog The Manual Staff Visibility dialog allows you to hide, show, and reset individual staves manually from system/frame breaks. You can open the Manual Staff Visibility dialog in Write mode in any of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Staff > Manual Staff Visibility when an item is selected in the music area. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Layout and formatting Page formatting staves between the final system and the bottom of the page when formatting part layouts for recording sessions. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show blank staves after the ends of flows. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Starting layouts on left-hand pages By default, all layouts start on a right-hand page, as convention dictates that odd numbered pages are always on the right-hand page. However, you can set individual layouts to start on a left-hand page, for example, to facilitate page turns better in that layout. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts you want to start on a left-hand page.
Layout and formatting Page formatting NOTE Flows are not automatically split into separate music frames. You must insert frame breaks manually to divide flows into separate music frames if required.
Layout and formatting Page formatting Hiding/Showing flow headings You can hide/show flow headings in each layout independently, for example, if your project only contains a single flow and you only want to show the project title. You can also hide the heading for the first flow but show flow headings for subsequent flows. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show flow headings.
Layout and formatting Page formatting 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the margins above/below flow headings. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4.
Layout and formatting Page formatting By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4. In the Flows section, choose one of the following options for Flow title in header: 5. 6. 7.
Layout and formatting Staff size RESULT The margins within all music frames in the selected layouts are changed.
Layout and formatting Staff size For individual staves, you can use a scale size of the default staff size in the layout. The most appropriate staff size depends on the intended purpose of the layout. For example, full orchestral scores that are quite dense need a much smaller staff size than individual parts, which require large enough notes so that performers can read them easily. Staves can overlap and the music can become illegible if the staff size is too large in dense scores.
Layout and formatting Staff size TIP If you want to change the staff size to represent an alternative version of a passage, you can instead add an ossia staff, which you can show for specific regions. PROCEDURE 1. Select an item on the staff whose size you want to change. NOTE You can only change the size of a single staff at a time. 2. Choose Edit > Staff Size > [Staff size]. You can also choose this option from the context menu. 3.
Layout and formatting Casting off The Custom Staff Size dialog contains the following options: Default staff size Displays the default size of staves in the current layout. This size is set on the Page Setup page in Setup > Layout Options. The default staff size is expressed as both a point size and in your preferred unit of measurement. Rastral size Allows you to select the rastral size on which you want to base your custom staff size.
Layout and formatting Casting off 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to fix the number of bars per system. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Staves and Systems in the category list. 4. In the Casting Off section, activate Fixed number of bars per system.
Layout and formatting Frame breaks Frame breaks In Dorico Elements, you can use frame breaks to push musical material into the next frame, which is usually on the next page, meaning you can use frame breaks to create page breaks. For example, you can use frame breaks to insert page turns at specific positions in part layouts. Frame breaks are indicated by signposts, which you can hide/show at any time. They are also layout-specific, meaning each layout can have frame breaks at different rhythmic positions.
Layout and formatting System breaks Hiding/Showing frame break signposts You can hide/show frame break signposts at any time. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Signposts > Frame Breaks. RESULT Frame break signposts are shown when a tick appears beside Frame Breaks in the menu, and hidden when no tick appears. Deleting frame breaks You can delete frame breaks after you have inserted them. PREREQUISITE Frame break signposts are shown. PROCEDURE 1.
Layout and formatting Tacets PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a note or item at the rhythmic position where you want to insert a system break. For example, if you select a clef, the clef is placed at the end of the system, and the notes are moved to the start of the next system. 2. Choose Edit > System Break. RESULT A system break is inserted immediately before the rhythmic position of the earliest selected item. All notations after the system break are moved to the next system.
Layout and formatting Tacets ● You have removed the player from the flows in which they do not play. ● The flows are assigned to the part layout. ● The flows are assigned to the master page frame chain in the part layout. ● You have chosen to show tacets in the part layout. An extract of a part layout where the player is tacet in the second flow NOTE We do not recommend that you use Copy Staff Spacing and Lock Frame on pages where tacets are the first or last system in frames.
Layout and formatting Tacets ● The flows are assigned to the master page frame chain in the part layout. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show tacets. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3.
Layout and formatting Condensing Changing the margins above/below tacets You can change the margins both above/below tacets in each layout independently, for example, if you want smaller gaps between flow headings and tacets in some layouts to facilitate page turns better. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the margins above/below tacets.
Layout and formatting Part formatting propagation Part formatting propagation The propagation of part formatting involves copying the layout options and system formatting that determine the layouts of pages in specific part layouts and applying them to other part layouts. This can save time when formatting similar parts. System formatting includes the positions of system and frame breaks, but also note spacing changes that affect the horizontal space that notes require.
Layout and formatting Part formatting propagation The Propagate Part Formatting dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Copy formatting from list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can only select a single part layout as the source layout. 2 Propagate formatting to list Contains a list of all the part layouts in the project. You can select multiple part layouts as destination layouts.
Layout and formatting Part formatting propagation options, such as page size and margins, and other page formatting, such as system and frame breaks. NOTE ● Part formatting propagation is only available for part layouts. You cannot propagate part formatting from/to full score or custom score layouts. ● We do not recommend using layouts with multiple music frame chains as either source or destination layouts as you can get unexpected results. PROCEDURE 1.
Layout and formatting Music Fonts dialog 2. Choose Edit > Propagate Properties. RESULT All properties set on the selected notes/items are copied to all layouts and frame chains in which those notes/items appear. TIP If you know in advance that you want your changes to affect all layouts and frame chains, you can change the property scope before changing property settings. RELATED LINKS Large selections on page 336 Local vs.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs. text in text frames Update text fonts when changing music fonts Allows you to include/exclude text fonts when changing the music font. For example, deactivating this option allows you to change the appearance of notes and notations without affecting the appearance of flow titles and staff labels. ● For the Bravura music font, the equivalent text font is Academico. ● For the Petaluma music font, the equivalent text font is Petaluma Script.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs. text in text frames Tokens can refer to information in the Project Info dialog, including for the whole project or each flow individually. Tokens can also refer to the current time and date or the time and date the project was last saved. NOTE ● You can only use text tokens in text frames. You cannot use tokens in staff/system text objects. ● Flow tokens refer to the nearest flow below the top edge of their text frame and on the same page.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs. text in text frames You can use staff label tokens, for example, as an alternative way to name part layouts, instead of using the default {@layoutName@} token shown at the top left of the first page in part layouts. NOTE Staff label tokens might not exactly match the appearance of staff labels shown before initial barlines; however, staff label tokens respect your per-layout options for how transpositions appear in staff labels.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs. text in text frames Adding borders to text objects You can add borders to text and system text objects individually, for example, if you want to make the boundaries of text objects clear. PROCEDURE 1. Select the text objects to which you want to add borders. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Border in the Text group. RESULT Borders are added to the selected text objects. TIP Deactivating Border removes borders from the selected text objects.
Layout and formatting Text objects vs.
Layout and formatting Note spacing RESULT The text objects are hidden when Hide is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden text object. However, signposts are not printed by default. TIP ● If you do not want to show text signposts, choose View > Signposts > Text.
Layout and formatting Note spacing 3. Click Note Spacing in the category list. 4. Change the values of the options you want to change. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default note spacing is changed in the selected layouts. RELATED LINKS Changing the horizontal justification of final systems on page 382 Note Spacing page in Layout Options The Note Spacing page in Layout Options allows you to change the default values for note spacing in each layout independently.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing Only justify final system in flow when more than [n]% full Allows you to change how full the final system in each flow must be before it is justified to the full width of the frame. By default, final systems that are 50% full or less are not justified. Use optical spacing for beams between staves When activated, stems in cross-staff beams are evenly spaced, which can mean the noteheads are unevenly spaced.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing very full frames, such as reducing the space between staves with no dynamics to allow more space between staves with dynamics. Similarly, we recommend setting vertical spacing options after you have finished inputting notes and items, as this allows you to consider the entire project when setting these options.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing Vertical Justification Contains options that allow you to control the frame fullness thresholds above which you want staves and/or systems to justify vertically automatically. ● Justify distance between staves and systems when frame is at least [n]% full: When frames are filled above this threshold, the staves and systems they contain are all automatically vertically justified, meaning they are evenly distributed to fill the height of the frame.
Layout and formatting Staff spacing with very high/low notes can be useful because Dorico Elements does not perform automatic collision avoidance in galley view. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the staff spacing in galley view. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Play mode Play mode allows you to change how your music sounds in playback, including by changing the playback template and assigning VST instruments, inputting automation, adjusting the mix, and changing the sounding duration of notes in playback without affecting their notated duration.
Play mode Project window in Play mode 2 Event display Allows you to view, input, and edit the playback of each flow in your project, including changing the played duration of notes and the tempo at any rhythmic position. 3 VST and MIDI Instruments panel Allows you to load new VST and MIDI instruments. You can also select existing VST and MIDI instruments and edit their settings.
Play mode Project window in Play mode You can also select Line by pressing L . Draw Percussion Allows you to add notes to percussion staves in the drum editor with one click. You do not have to click and drag to a duration when using Draw Percussion. You can also select Draw Percussion by pressing W . Erase Allows you to delete notes. You can make marquee selections to delete multiple notes when Erase is selected. You can also select Erase by pressing E . TIP To deselect Erase, select Object Selection.
Play mode Project window in Play mode VST and MIDI Instruments panel The VST and MIDI instruments panel contains the VST and MIDI instruments available and used in your project, and allows you to edit their settings. It is located on the right of the window in Play mode.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Plug-in instances are automatically numbered to help you differentiate between instances when you have multiple instances of the same plug-in. NOTE Dorico Elements only shows VST 3 instruments in the VST Instruments section by default. If you also want VST 2 instruments to be available, you must allow them. Only Kontakt and NotePerformer are allowed by default.
Play mode Project window in Play mode Plug-in instances are automatically numbered to help you differentiate between instances when you have multiple instances of the same plug-in. Each MIDI instance contains the following: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the plug-in instance. 2 Endpoint Setup Opens the Endpoint Setup dialog for the corresponding plug-in instance.
Play mode Event display 2. In the plug-in instance into which you want to load a new VST/MIDI instrument, select the one you want to load from the menu. RELATED LINKS Playback templates on page 473 Allowing/Blocking VST plug-ins You can allow individual VST 2 instrument plug-ins that you want to use in Dorico Elements and block plug-in you want to prevent Dorico Elements from using. Allowed plug-ins are subsequently available in any project.
Play mode Event display notation. The event display presents your project in a similar way to that used in a digital audio workstation, or “DAW”, such as Cubase. Event display in Play mode The event display comprises the following: 1 Flow menu Allows you to select the flow you want to be shown in the event display. Only a single flow is shown at a time. 2 Track headers Display the name of each track and contain appropriate options for the track type.
Play mode Event display RELATED LINKS Playhead on page 457 Tracks on page 426 Play toolbox on page 413 Bar numbers on page 563 Piano roll editor The piano roll editor displays MIDI notes for pitched instruments in a continuous sequence, with the vertical position of note events indicating their pitch. In Dorico Elements, pitched instruments are displayed in an individual piano roll editor for their instrument track.
Play mode Event display Drum editor Each unpitched percussion instrument has its own instrument track, including when they are in a percussion kit. You can expand unpitched percussion instrument tracks like other instrument tracks if you want to make changes, such as assigning the instrument to another playback endpoint.
Play mode Event display ● For pitched instruments, click and drag horizontally in the piano roll for the required duration at the pitch position you want. ● For unpitched percussion instruments, click in the drum editor at the positions where you want to input notes. RESULT In the piano roll editor, notes are input at the pitches indicated by the piano keyboard on the left of the piano roll.
Play mode Event display ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move them to the left. ● Click and drag them to the right/left. RESULT The selected notes are moved to new rhythmic positions. If you selected multiple notes, they are moved together as a block. NOTE When using the keyboard, you can both transpose and move notes in the piano roll editor in the same action. When using the mouse, you must release the mouse between transposing and moving.
Play mode Event display NOTE If you select multiple notes that end at different rhythmic positions and drag them with the mouse pointer, changing their duration forces all the notes to end at the same rhythmic position. RELATED LINKS Expanding/Collapsing tracks on page 455 Played vs.
Play mode Event display ● When using the keyboard, you can both transpose and move notes in the piano roll editor in the same action. When using the mouse, you must release the mouse between transposing and moving. RELATED LINKS Moving notes in the event display on page 422 Equal Division of the Octave (EDO) on page 700 Play toolbox on page 413 Enabling independent voice playback on page 460 Deleting notes in the event display You can delete notes in the event display in Play mode.
Play mode Tracks Zooming in/out of tracks in the event display You can change the zoom level in the tracks in the event display to make notes appear larger/ smaller. This does not affect the height of tracks. PROCEDURE ● Change the zoom in any of the following ways: ● To make notes appear wider, press Ctrl/Cmd-= or Z . ● To make notes appear narrower, press Ctrl/Cmd-- or X . ● To make notes appear taller, Shift -click and drag upwards on the piano keyboard on the left.
Play mode Tracks Markers track Displays any markers in the flow, including their text. Video track Shows any video regions in the flow, including their file names. RELATED LINKS Event display on page 418 Time track on page 447 Chords track on page 452 Markers track on page 454 Video track on page 455 Expanding/Collapsing tracks on page 455 Instrument tracks Instrument tracks allow you to view, input, and edit notes belonging to the corresponding instrument.
Play mode Tracks Shows the name of the track. Instrument tracks use the full instrument name set in the Edit Instrument Names dialog for the instrument. 4 Track header Contains appropriate options for instrument tracks, such as VST or MIDI port/channel menus. 5 Piano roll editor/Drum editor Displays notes belonging to the instrument in either a piano roll editor or drum editor, depending on the instrument type.
Play mode Tracks Allows you to change the endpoint to which the instrument or voice is assigned by selecting the port you want to use when using a plug-in that has multiple ports of 16 channels. Not available when independent voice playback is enabled and All voices is selected. 7 Channel menu Allows you to change the endpoint to which the instrument or voice is assigned by selecting the channel in the selected VST or MIDI instrument that you want to use for the instrument track.
Play mode Tracks Dynamics lane below an instrument track Dynamics lanes comprise the following: 1 Lane height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the lane by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Show the dynamics lane Hides/Shows the dynamics lane. This button is located in the track header for the corresponding instrument track. 3 Lane header Shows the name of the lane. 4 Reference lines Indicate the vertical positions of the most common dynamic levels.
Play mode Tracks tool, points within a dynamic event region are constant by default. When you use the Line tool, dynamic event regions have a linear point at the start and a constant point at the end. NOTE Dynamic event regions that you input in the dynamics lane override default playback adjustments for dynamics, such as humanization and increased dynamics for notes with accents. However, the dynamic curve setting still applies to dynamic event regions.
Play mode Tracks 3. In each instrument track header, click Show the dynamics lane . RESULT The dynamics lane for each instrument track is shown when the button is highlighted, and hidden when it is not highlighted. For instrument tracks with independent voice playback enabled, the dynamics lane shows dynamics for the currently selected voice only. Inputting dynamic points You can input dynamic points, including gradual dynamic events, in the dynamics lane for each instrument track.
Play mode Tracks ● For sound libraries that use MIDI CC 1 to control dynamics, the automation lane for CC1 displays values from the dynamics you input, including dynamic points, combined with humanization.
Play mode Tracks EXAMPLE Constant points in a dynamics lane Linear points in a dynamics lane Copying and pasting dynamic points You can copy and paste dynamic points, including to other dynamics lanes and repeating them directly after themselves in the same dynamics lane. PREREQUISITE The dynamics lane is shown for each instrument whose dynamic points you want to copy/paste. PROCEDURE 1. Press S to select Object Selection. 2.
Play mode Tracks ● You can also repeat selections of two or more dynamic points immediately after themselves by pressing R . Each repetition starts at the same position as the last point in the previous repetition. However, you cannot repeat single dynamic points or the points of immediate, combined, or force dynamics input in Write mode.
Play mode Tracks ● To move points of dynamics input in Write mode to the right according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow . ● To move points of dynamics input in Write mode to the left according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow . NOTE When multiple dynamics are selected, you can only move them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. RESULT The selected dynamic points are moved to new positions.
Play mode Tracks RESULT The dynamic points you click or include in a marquee selection are deleted. Deleting points that overrode dynamics that you input in Write mode reverts those dynamics to their default points. Deleting the points of dynamics input in Write mode also deletes the corresponding dynamics.
Play mode Tracks Displays the velocity value of the currently selected note. You can change this value by changing the value in the value field. 5 Velocities whose value has been changed When you have edited the velocity of notes, their velocities appear darker in the velocity lane. 6 Selected note and velocity The currently selected notes and their velocities all appear highlighted. 7 Velocities with default values All notes have a default velocity value of 100.
Play mode Tracks ● If you have Draw velocity lane. ● If you have Line velocity lane. selected, click and draw any shape across the required range in the selected, click and drag a line across the required range in the RESULT The velocity of the affected notes is changed. When using the Object Selection tool, the velocities of the selected notes are changed proportionally. When using the Draw or Line tools, the velocities of all notes within the range are updated when you release the mouse.
Play mode Tracks the automation lane for CC1 displays values from the dynamics you input, including dynamic points, combined with humanization. Automation lane below an instrument track Automation lanes comprise the following: 1 Lane height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the lane by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Lane header Contains the MIDI controller menu and MIDI value field. 3 Show the automation lane Hides/Shows the automation lane.
Play mode Tracks TIP Clicking and dragging automation points in the automation lane causes a read-out to appear temporarily, showing their value. Although only a single automation lane can be displayed, it is possible to create data for multiple MIDI controllers in the same lane. Automation data is included when exporting MIDI files.
Play mode Tracks ● To input single automation points, click in the automation lane at each position where you want an automation point. ● To input an automation event region containing multiple automation points at regular intervals, click and drag in a single motion in the automation lane. ● To input gradual automation events, click and drag in the automation lane from where you want the gradual automation event to start to where you want it to end.
Play mode Tracks NOTE You can only make automation points constant/linear in a single automation lane at a time. 4. Right-click in the automation lane and choose one of the following options from the context menu: ● To make the selected points constant, choose Make Points Constant. ● To make the selected points linear, choose Make Points Linear. RESULT The selected automation points become constant or linear.
Play mode Tracks 4. Copy the selected automation points in any of the following ways: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-C . ● Choose Edit > Copy. You can also choose this option from the context menu. 5. Move the playhead to the position to which you want to paste the selected automation points. 6. Paste the selected automation points in any of the following ways: 7. ● Select the header of the automation lane into which you want to paste them and press Ctrl/Cmd-V .
Play mode Tracks ● To move them to the right/left only, Ctrl/Cmd -click and drag them to the right/left. ● To move them upwards/downwards only, Ctrl/Cmd -click and drag them upwards/ downwards. TIP ● If you want to move automation points upwards/downwards by smaller increments, you can press Alt when dragging. ● You cannot move automation points beyond other existing automation points during the same action when using the mouse.
Play mode Tracks Playing techniques lane below an instrument track Playing techniques lanes comprise the following: 1 Lane height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the lane by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Lane header Shows the name of the lane. 3 Show the playing techniques lane Hides/Shows the playing techniques lane. This button is located in the track header for the corresponding instrument track.
Play mode Tracks 3. In each instrument track header, click Show the playing techniques lane . RESULT The playing techniques lane for each instrument track is shown when the button is highlighted, and hidden when it is not highlighted. For instrument tracks with independent voice playback enabled, the playing techniques lane shows playing techniques for the currently selected voice only.
Play mode Tracks TIP Clicking and dragging tempo changes in the Time track causes a read-out to appear temporarily, showing their precise tempo. Time track header The Time track header contains the following: 1 Plug-in instance menu Allows you to select a VST or MIDI instrument plug-in instance to use for the click. 2 Edit Instrument Opens the corresponding VST or MIDI instrument, which allows you to edit its settings.
Play mode Tracks Exporting MIDI on page 69 Inputting tempo changes in the Time track You can input tempo changes, including gradual tempo changes, in the Time track in Play mode. Tempo changes input in the Time track do not appear in layouts, but instead are shown as signposts. PREREQUISITE The Time track is shown and expanded. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Play mode Tracks Moving tempo changes in the Time track You can move tempo changes to new rhythmic positions in the Time track. This affects their rhythmic position in all applicable layouts. PREREQUISITE The Time track is shown and expanded. PROCEDURE 1. Press S to select Object Selection. 2. In the Time track, select the tempo changes you want to move in one of the following ways: ● Click a single tempo change. ● Make a marquee selection around multiple absolute tempo changes.
Play mode Tracks ● Click a single tempo change. ● Make a marquee selection around multiple absolute tempo changes. NOTE For gradual tempo changes, you can only change the tempo of a single point at a time. 3. To change the tempo of the selected tempo changes without moving them rhythmically, Ctrl/Cmd -click and drag the selected tempo change, or one of the selected tempo changes, upwards/downwards. A tempo read-out appears beside the mouse pointer, providing visual feedback of the tempo.
Play mode Tracks RELATED LINKS Selecting multiple items using marquee selections on page 335 Chords track A Chords track is included in every project. You can assign the Chords track to its own endpoint to hear any chords that you input into the score as chord symbols in playback. The Chords track appears above the top instrument track in the event display, and is one of the tracks you can hide/show.
Play mode Tracks 3 Enable Chords Playback Allows you to include chords in, or exclude chords from, playback. 4 Port menu Allows you to change the endpoint to which the Chords track is assigned by selecting the port you want to use when using a plug-in that has multiple ports of 16 channels. 5 Channel menu Allows you to change the endpoint to which the Chords track is assigned by selecting the channel in the selected VST or MIDI instrument that you want to use for chords playback.
Play mode Tracks Markers track The Markers track allows you to view the markers in your project and input new ones. It appears above the top instrument track in the event display in Play mode, and is one of the tracks you can hide/show. The Markers track comprises the following: 1 Track height adjuster Allows you to change the height of the track by clicking and dragging its bottom corner. 2 Track header Shows the name of the track and contains appropriate options.
Play mode Tracks EXAMPLE Marker in the Markers track AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the text shown in the marker. RELATED LINKS Changing the start position of videos on page 139 Editing marker text on page 846 Moving the playhead on page 457 Video track The Video track shows where videos exist in the flow relative to the music. It appears above the top instrument track in the event display in Play mode, and is one of the tracks you can hide/show.
Play mode Tracks controls in track headers and to input and edit track contents, such as notes in the piano roll editor and tempo changes in the Time track. PROCEDURE ● Expand/Collapse tracks in any of the following ways: ● To expand/collapse an individual track, click its disclosure arrow. ● To expand/collapse all instrument tracks, Ctrl/Cmd -click any instrument track disclosure arrow.
Play mode Playhead Playhead The playhead is a vertical line that moves during playback, showing the current rhythmic position. It is also known as a “playback line”. The playhead appears at all times in Play mode and during playback in other modes, and its current position is shown in both the Transport window and the mini transport in the toolbar. You can also choose to show the playhead when playback is stopped in other modes.
Play mode Playing back music ● Click Fast Forward in the Transport window to navigate forwards. ● Click Rewind in the Transport window to navigate backwards. ● Click Rewind to Beginning of Flow in the Transport window to go back to the start of the flow. ● In Play mode, click the ruler at any position. NOTE You cannot click the ruler to move the playhead during playback.
Play mode Playing back music ● To play back all instruments from the selection, select a single note and press P . ● To play back all instruments from the selection, select a single note and choose Play > Play From Selection. ● To play back only a single staff, select multiple items on the staff and press P . NOTE This does not affect which channels are soloed or muted in Play mode. ● To play back multiple staves, select items on multiple staves and press P .
Play mode Playing back music Mini transport on page 25 Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 47 Status bar on page 32 Preferences dialog on page 45 Enabling independent voice playback By default, all voices belonging to a single instrument, including divisi staves, use the same endpoint for playback. You can enable independent voice playback, for example, to hear the different playing techniques in playback for a string divisi where some parts are pizzicato and some parts are arco.
Play mode Playing back music Muting/Soloing tracks You can mute/solo individual tracks. This allows you to set fixed groups to sound in playback, for example, if you only want to listen to certain groups of players at a time. PROCEDURE 1. In the toolbar, click Show Mixer 2. In the Mixer, click the appropriate button at the top of each channel you want to mute/solo. ● Mute ● Solo to show the Mixer. RESULT Each track is muted/soloed and the corresponding buttons are enabled.
Play mode Playing back music RESULT The selected instruments are soloed and all other instruments are muted by changing their mute/solo states in the Mixer. This affects which instruments are muted/soloed until you deactivate their mute/solo states. TIP You can also determine which staves are included in playback for each separate playback without changing their states in the Mixer.
Play mode Playing back music PROCEDURE ● In the Mixer, Ctrl/Cmd -click each volume fader that you want to reset. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing the Mixer window on page 471 Mixer on page 469 Changing the tempo mode You can switch the tempo mode at any time between using a single fixed tempo and following tempo changes, for example, if you have a project with multiple tempo changes but want to use a single fixed tempo when recording MIDI. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Play mode Repeats in playback Repeats in playback Dorico Elements supports the playback of repeat structures, including repeat endings, repeat barlines, and repeat markers, provided all the correct jumps and sections are in place. There is no limit to the number of repeat structures you can have in a single flow and still obtain correct playback. By default, Dorico Elements plays sections between repeat barlines twice and includes repeats in playback, except after repeat jumps, such as D.S. al Coda.
Play mode Repeats in playback EXAMPLE Final repeat barline with the default 2 playthroughs set Final repeat barline with 4 playthroughs set and marker shown RELATED LINKS Types of barlines on page 558 Input methods for bars, beats, and barlines on page 235 Including/Excluding repeats in playback after repeat jumps on page 465 Changing the total number of playthroughs in repeat endings on page 853 Including/Excluding repeats in playback after repeat jumps By default, Dorico Elements plays back all playt
Play mode Swing playback Swing playback Swing is a style of performance where equally-notated notes are played in a regular pattern of alternating longer and shorter notes, which commonly entails eighth notes being played as a quarter note triplet followed by an eighth note triplet.
Play mode Swing playback 2:1 swing 8ths (fixed) Extends the first note in a pair of eighth notes to be twice as long as the second, creating a strict triplet 2:1 ratio. This is also known as a “triplet swing”. This ratio is maintained regardless of the tempo by default. 3:1 swing 16ths (fixed) Extends the first note in a pair of 16th notes to be three times as long as the second, creating a dotted 16th-32nd ratio (dotted semiquaver-demisemiquaver).
Play mode Swing playback ● If you want to enable swing playback within a section then return to straight playback, select multiple items that span the duration where you want swing playback/a different rhythmic feel. NOTE ● If you want to enable swing playback for a single instrument, select an item or items that belong to that instrument only. ● If you select an item in the middle of a bar, the rhythmic feel change only takes effect from the start of the next bar. 2.
Play mode Mixer PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the signposts of the rhythmic changes you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The rhythmic changes are deleted. The affected staves return to the default non-swing playback until the next existing rhythmic change signpost, if applicable. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing signposts on page 350 Mixer The Mixer allows you to control the sounds produced in playback, both for the master output and on each individual channel.
Play mode Mixer the Edit Instrument Names dialog and its instrument number, if applicable. Channels are stereo by default. 6 Mute/Solo Allows you to mute/solo individual tracks. 7 Balance panner Allows you to position the sound of each individual track on the stereo spectrum for stereo playback. 8 Fader Allows you to control the volume level of each individual track. MIDI channels have a MIDI fader. 9 Channel meter Indicates the output volume of each individual channel in real time.
Play mode Mixer Mixer channel strips Each channel in the Mixer has its own channel strip, which contains the channel controls. You can hide/show each type of channel control by clicking the corresponding button at the top of the mixer. Each channel strip contains the following types of controls: Inserts Each channel has four slots into which you can load an insert. You can select an insert from the available options in the menu. EQ Each channel has four bands of EQ.
Play mode Transport window Transport window The Transport window contains playback and MIDI recording functions, such as rewinding and fast-forwarding. It contains additional and more precise versions of the playback functions available in the toolbar. You can hide/show the Transport window in any of the following ways: ● Press F2 . ● Click Show Transport Bar in the toolbar.
Play mode Playback templates Plays/Mutes the metronome click during playback and recording. 12 Fixed Tempo Mode Displays the tempo used for both playback and recording. The value changes according to the current position of the playhead and its appearance changes according to its current mode.
Play mode Playback templates When you add instruments to players in a project, Dorico Elements automatically loads plug-ins for them according to the current playback template and sets up expression maps and percussion maps as required. Dorico Elements also automatically loads enough plug-in instances, as many plug-ins can only load a limited number of sounds in each instance.
Play mode Playback templates ● Silence: Prevents Dorico Elements from loading sounds. TIP ● Choosing the Silence template makes Dorico Elements project files significantly smaller, for example, if you want to send them electronically. ● We recommend that you only use the HSSE+HSO (Pro) playback template if you own a separate HALion Symphonic Orchestra license, as Dorico Elements only includes HALion Sonic SE.
Play mode Playback templates NOTE You cannot edit factory default playback templates. ● Show Factory table. : Allows you to hide/show factory default playback templates in the ● Export: Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the location to which you want to export the currently selected playback templates as .dorico_pt files. You can then import the .dorico_pt files into Dorico Elements on other computers and share them with other users.
Play mode Playback templates The Edit Playback Template dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Playback template data Allows you to specify the following identifying information for the selected custom playback template: ● Name: Allows you to set the name of the playback template that appears in the program, for example, in the Apply Playback Template dialog. ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the playback template.
Play mode Playback templates you always include a factory default playback template at the bottom of the list as a fallback to ensure that all instruments are assigned sounds. In most cases, listing entries in your order of preference in the Entries section is sufficient to achieve your desired playback.
Play mode Playback templates Applying/Resetting playback templates You can change the playback template applied to the current project, for example, if you do not need to use playback and so want to prevent Dorico Elements from loading sounds. Re-selecting playback templates resets them to their default settings. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Play > Playback Template to open the Apply Playback Template dialog. 2. Select the playback template you want to use. 3. Click Apply and Close.
Play mode Playback templates ● To add a factory default playback template, click Add Automatic and select the one you want from the menu. TIP We recommend that you always include a factory default playback template at the bottom of the list as a fallback to ensure that all instruments are assigned sounds. 6.
Play mode Endpoints 4. Click Open. RESULT The selected playback template is imported. It becomes available in the current project and all projects you create/open on your computer. TIP You can also import playback templates by dragging .dorico_pt files into a Dorico Elements project window. Exporting playback templates You can export playback templates so you can send them to other users or use them on other computers.
Play mode Endpoints NOTE Any changes you make within plug-ins are not communicated to Dorico Elements, for example, changing a sound that the expression map expects to use a modulation wheel for dynamics to one that uses note velocity instead. This can lead to unexpected low notes sounding in playback because Dorico Elements is still using the expression and percussion maps for the original sounds.
Play mode Endpoints Displays the number of MIDI ports the corresponding plug-in instance currently uses. You can change the number of MIDI ports, for example, if you are using a plug-in that uses more than one port. Dorico Elements does not load multiple MIDI ports by default. 3 Number of MIDI channels Displays the number of MIDI channels the corresponding plug-in instance currently uses.
Play mode Endpoints Allows you to change the number of audio outputs shown in the Mixer, for example, if you want to hide unused outputs when using plug-ins that provide more audio outputs than Dorico Elements uses. 7 Save Endpoint Configuration Opens the Save Endpoint Configuration dialog, which allows you to enter a name for the current endpoint configuration and save it as a custom endpoint configuration.
Play mode Endpoints 4. ● To save a custom endpoint configuration for only a single plug-in instance, open the Endpoint Setup dialog for that plug-in instance and click Save Endpoint Configuration. ● To save a custom endpoint configuration that includes all VST instrument or MIDI instrument plug-in instances, click Save Endpoint Configuration in the action bar of the corresponding section of the VST and MIDI Instruments panel. Enter a name for your custom endpoint configuration in the Name field.
Play mode Endpoints The Save Endpoint Configuration dialog contains a Name field that allows you to enter a name for the endpoint configuration you are saving. The arrow at the end of the field allows you to select an existing custom endpoint configuration to use to populate the field. If you enter a name that already exists, you can overwrite the existing custom endpoint configuration.
Play mode Endpoints Apply Playback Template dialog on page 474 Assigning instruments/voices to endpoints You can assign instruments to any endpoint, for example, if you have loaded a plug-in with multiple ports and want to change the endpoint of an existing instrument to an endpoint on one of your new ports. For instruments with independent voice playback enabled, you can assign each voice to a different endpoint.
Play mode Expression maps Enabling independent voice playback on page 460 Assigning expression/percussion maps to endpoints You can assign expression/percussion maps to the endpoints in your project, for example, if you have created a custom percussion map and must link it to the endpoint for the corresponding VST patch. PREREQUISITE You have made or imported any expression/percussion maps that you require but do not exist on your computer. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Expression maps Different patches and instruments have different approaches to changing dynamics and volume in playback. For example, some patches only change the velocity whereas others use a controller in combination with changing the velocity. Dorico Elements also uses expression maps to specify the playback techniques that are supported by each patch in your project.
Play mode Expression maps The Expression Maps dialog contains the following sections and options: Expression maps list 1 Expression maps list: Contains the expression maps currently available in your project. 2 Search field: Allows you to search for expression maps by name. 3 Show only expression maps used in this project: Allows you to filter the expression maps list so it only includes expression maps used in the current project.
Play mode Expression maps ● Add Expression Map : Adds a new expression map that contains no existing settings. ● Duplicate Expression Map : Creates a copy of an existing expression map that you can edit separately from the original. ● Delete Expression Map : Deletes the selected expression maps. NOTE You can only delete custom expression maps. You cannot delete any default expression maps.
Play mode Expression maps You can hide/show the Base and Add-on Switches section by clicking the section header. The Base and Add-on Switches section contains the following: 1 Switches table: Contains the switches in the currently selected expression map. Allows you to add new switches and edit existing ones. 2 Name: Allows you to change the name that appears for the currently selected switch in the Switches table, for example, so it appears the same as in your sound library.
Play mode Expression maps The Switches table comprises the following: 1 2 Type column: Displays the switch type. Switches can be any of the following types: ● Base ● Add-on ● Init Name column: Displays the name of the switch. By default, this is the same as the playback technique or playback technique combination it triggers. In simple cases, each switch triggers an individual playback technique, such as Staccato or Accent.
Play mode Expression maps ● Delete Technique : Deletes the selected switch. Selecting a switch in the Switches table allows you to edit its controls and actions. Different options are available in the Base and Add-on Switches section depending on the switch type. NOTE ● Most instruments have a “natural” playback technique, which is the most common way of playing the instrument. Dorico Elements requires every instrument to have a defined natural playback technique.
Play mode Expression maps NOTE 4 ● You can change the values of cells in the Actions table by double-clicking them, or selecting them and pressing Return . ● You can only select one action at a time in the Actions table. Actions table action bar: Contains the following options: : Adds a control change action with default settings.
Play mode Expression maps ● ● !=: Not equal to ● <: Less than ● <=: Less than or equal to ● >: More than ● >=: More than or equal to Third column: Controls the note length used by the condition. The following note length values are available: ● Very short: A dotted 16th note at 120 bpm, or 0.1875 seconds ● Short: A dotted eighth note at 120 bpm, or 0.375 seconds ● Medium: A dotted quarter note at 120 bpm, or 0.75 seconds ● Long: A dotted half note at 120 bpm, or 1.
Play mode Expression maps ● Volume dynamic: Allows you to choose whether the volume dynamic for the selected switch is controlled by its Note velocity or a Control change. If you choose Control change, you must specify the controller by number. You can consult the documentation for the VST instrument and/or MIDI controller you are using to find the appropriate controller number.
Play mode Expression maps libraries supports a particular playback technique combination for an instrument but another sound library does not. You can hide/show the Mutual Exclusion Groups section by clicking the section header. The Mutual Exclusion Groups section contains the following options and columns: 1 Auto: Allows Dorico Elements to define mutual exclusion groups automatically. NOTE Activating Auto permanently deletes any manual exclusion groups you have created.
Play mode Expression maps Reset to Library Defaults Allows you to revert any changes you have made to the expression maps from the Default Library. Import Library Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder, where you can select the .doricolib files that you want to import as expression maps. You can also import Dorico and Cubase expression maps by dragging and dropping them into the Expression Maps dialog.
Play mode Expression maps 1 Techniques list Allows you to select playback techniques to include in a new switch or to change the playback techniques in an existing switch. You can select multiple playback techniques to combine by Ctrl/Cmd -clicking each playback technique. 2 Name Displays the name of the selected playback technique. If you select multiple playback techniques, each name is automatically separated by a + symbol.
Play mode Expression maps Add-on A switch that applies in addition to the existing base switch. For example, some sound libraries allow you to use the same legato switch in addition to different base switches. Add-on switches do not remove or change base switches. Add-on switches can only trigger simple key switch notes and controller values. Init A switch that sends instructions when playback starts, such as ensuring a MIDI controller always starts at a set value.
Play mode Expression maps and want to use the same switches for all four trumpets, you might use a relative channel change action to switch from the “natural” original channel to “muted” on the +1 relative channel. Relative channel numbers relate to the original channel number of the endpoint for the corresponding instrument. A 0 relative channel change switches back to the original channel. TIP You can add actions to individual switches in the Expression Maps dialog.
Play mode Expression maps Adding/Editing mutual exclusion groups in expression maps on page 504 Adding/Editing switches in expression maps You can create new and edit existing switches that trigger playback techniques or combinations of playback techniques in individual expression maps, for example, to add an add-on switch to an existing base switch or to create a new base switch with note length conditions.
Play mode Expression maps 10. Choose one of the following pitches for Middle C (note 60): ● C3 ● C4 ● C5 NOTE Steps 11 to 15 only apply to base switches. For init and add-on switches, you can skip to step 16. 11. Optional: Repeat steps 6 to 10 for each action you require for the currently selected switch. 12. In the Conditions table, add a condition for the currently selected base switch in one of the following ways: ● To create a new condition, click Add Technique in the action bar.
Play mode Expression maps 7. In the Mutual Exclusion Groups column, select the mutual exclusion groups whose playback techniques you want to change. 8. Change the playback techniques in the selected mutual exclusion group in any of the following ways: 9. ● To add new playback techniques to the mutual exclusion group, click Add in the Has techniques column action bar to open the Playing Technique Combinations dialog, select the playback techniques you want to add, then click OK.
Play mode Percussion maps RESULT The selected expression maps are exported as a .doricolib file and saved in the selected location. Percussion maps Unpitched percussion instruments are played back using patches that map unpitched sounds onto different MIDI notes. The pitches required to produce different unpitched sounds vary by device, sound library, manufacturer, and so on, and have no connection to the position of percussion instruments on five-line staves.
Play mode Percussion maps The Percussion Maps dialog is divided into the following sections: 1 Percussion maps list Contains the percussion maps currently available in your project. You can add and delete percussion maps using the following buttons in the action bar at the bottom of the percussion maps list: ● Add Percussion Map ● Duplicate Percussion Map : Creates a copy of an existing percussion map that you can edit separately from the original.
Play mode Percussion maps ● ID: Allows you to set the unique ID of the percussion map. You can enter any content in the ID field. It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. ● Version: Allows you to indicate the percussion map version so you can identify the most recent one.
Play mode Percussion maps You can change the data for the currently selected drum kit note in the Edit Drum Kit Note subsection. 7 Edit Drum Kit Note subsection Allows you to specify data in the following fields for the drum kit note currently selected in the Drum Kit Note Map table: ● Name: The displayed name for the specific combination of instrument and playback technique. You may choose to input the name used in the manufacturer’s documentation for your VST instrument or MIDI output device.
Play mode Percussion maps It can be useful to include the instrument and sound library for which you created the map, as well as your name, in the identification name for percussion maps, for example, xmap.user.paulsmith.hso.cowbell. 6. Choose one of the following options for Map defines sounds for, as appropriate for the current percussion map: ● Multiple Instruments ● Single Instruments 7. In the Drum Kit Note Map section, click Show all to show unmapped notes. 8.
Play mode Percussion maps Importing percussion maps You can import percussion maps into projects. Percussion maps are saved as .doricolib files. PROCEDURE 1. Choose Play > Percussion Maps to open the Percussion Maps dialog. 2. Click Import Library to open the File Explorer/macOS Finder. 3. Locate and select the percussion map file you want to import. 4. Click Open. RESULT The selected percussion map is imported into your project. It appears in the percussion maps list.
Play mode Playback techniques 3. Click Add Technique in the action bar at the bottom left of the dialog. 4. Click Choose Playing Techniques beside the Playback playing technique field to open the Playing Technique Combinations dialog. 5. Select the playback techniques you want. TIP You can select a single playback technique or combine multiple playback techniques. To select multiple playback techniques, Ctrl/Cmd -click each playback technique. 6.
Play mode Playback techniques You can see which playback techniques are in use at any particular rhythmic position in the playing techniques lane for the corresponding instrument track. TIP ● If you have input a playing technique but cannot hear a change in the sound, you might be using a combination of playback techniques that the expression map does not expect.
Play mode Playback techniques The Edit Playback Techniques dialog contains the following sections and options: 1 Category menu Allows you to filter the list of playback techniques by selecting a category from the menu, such as Techniques or Dynamics. 2 Playback techniques list Contains all the playback techniques in the project within the currently selected category.
Play mode Played vs. notated note durations ● Fallback: Allows you to specify another playback technique that can be used if the present one is not available. ● Articulation type: Sets the duration over which the playback technique takes effect. Attribute applies only to the note at the rhythmic position where the playing technique is found, such as a staccato articulation, while Direction applies to all following notes until it is replaced by another playing technique, such as pizzicato.
Play mode Played vs. notated note durations RELATED LINKS Slurs in playback on page 900 Changing the played duration of notes You can change the played duration of notes individually, both at the start and end of notes. For example, you can make notes sound for longer or start sounding later. PREREQUISITE ● Played Durations is selected in the Play toolbox. ● Object Selection is selected in the Play toolbox. PROCEDURE 1.
Play mode Played vs. notated note durations default played duration. For example, if the notes are staccato, their played duration is half their notated duration by default. RELATED LINKS Velocity lanes on page 437 MIDI recording on page 204 Importing MIDI on page 65 MIDI Import Options dialog on page 66 517 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Print mode Print mode allows you to print your layouts or to export them as graphics files, such as PDF and SVG. ● When printing layouts, you can specify the paper size and other options, such as duplex or booklet printing. ● When exporting layouts, you can specify different graphics file types and the information you want to include in their exported file names.
Print mode Project window in Print mode Shows a list of all layouts in your project and allows you to select what to print or export. NOTE The layout selector in the toolbar is disabled in Print mode. If you want to see a different layout in the print preview area, select it in the Layouts panel. 2 Print Options panel Contains options for printing or exporting your layouts. 3 System Dialogs (macOS only) Contains macOS-specific printing options.
Print mode Project window in Print mode The Layouts panel contains all the layouts in your project, displayed as cards. Each layout card shows the following: 1 Disclosure arrow Expands/Collapses the layout card. 2 Layout type Shows the type of layout from the following options: 3 ● Full score layout ● Instrumental part layout ● Custom score layout Layout name Shows the name of the layout.
Print mode Project window in Print mode ● Press Ctrl/Cmd-9 . ● Click the disclosure arrow on the right edge of the main window. ● Choose Window > Show Right Panel. All the options that you set in the Print Options panel are saved with your project. The options are divided into the following sections: Destination Allows you to select a physical printer for printing or a file location for exporting a graphics file.
Print mode Printing layouts print. If you choose to export a graphics file, you can specify the format, color mode, image resolution, file name, and directory of the saved file. Depending on the destination type selected, the button at the bottom of the panel reads either Print or Export. If you have selected some layouts set to print and some set to export graphics, the button reads Print and Export. Job Type Allows you to choose the range of pages to be printed or exported and how they are arranged.
Print mode Printing layouts TIP You can select individual layouts and set up their printing options without printing straight away. Once you have set up the printing options you want for different layouts, you can then select all the layouts you want to print and click Print. Your existing print settings are applied, even if your selection contains layouts with different print settings. For example, you can set your full score layout to print 3 booklet copies and the part layouts to print 1 2-up copy each.
Print mode Printing layouts 16. In the Annotations section, activate each annotation you want to add to the selected layouts. 17. Click Print. RESULT The selected layouts are printed according to the print settings you have applied. If your selection included part layouts set to concert pitch, Dorico Elements shows a warning and offers to switch them all to transposed pitch before printing/exporting. You can also select which layouts you want to switch to transposed pitch or proceed anyway with no changes.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files 5. Click Print/Export/Print and Export. RESULT The specified pages in the selected layouts are printed/exported. Exported files use the file name recipe set for their graphics file format in the Export File Names dialog. RELATED LINKS Export File Names dialog on page 528 Page arrangements for printing/exporting on page 530 Specifying printing options (macOS only) Dorico Elements allows you to access the standard printing options of your operating system.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files TIP We recommend including the Page number token for PNG, SVG, and TIFF files as each page in layouts using these formats is exported as a separate file. 7. Optional: If you only want to export a specified range of pages, choose Page Range in the Job Type section. 8. Optional: If you selected Page Range, enter the pages you want into the value field. ● To specify a range, enter the first page and last page separated with a dash, such as 1-4.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files Changing the image settings for layouts You can change the graphics file format, color mode, and image resolution of layouts individually, for example, if you want to export some layouts as PDF files but others as PNG files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose export path you want to change. 2. In the Print Options panel, choose Graphics in the Destination section. 3. Select a graphics file format from the menu. 4.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files 4. Click Select Folder (Windows)/Open (macOS) to insert the new path in the Destination folder field. 5. Optional: Repeat steps 1 to 4 for other layouts whose export path you want to change. 6. Optional: If you want to change the file name recipe, click File Name Options to open the Export File Names dialog. 7. Optional: In the Export File Names dialog, change the file name recipe for your selected graphics file formats.
Print mode Exporting layouts as graphics files The Export File Names dialog contains the following options: 1 File names for Allows you to select different graphics file formats. You can set different file name recipes for each graphics file format. 2 Preview Displays an example file name based on the current recipe. The layout used for the preview is the one shown in the layout selector in the toolbar.
Print mode Printers NOTE The page number ingredient is not available for the PDF file name recipe as it is a multi-page format. 7 Default separator Allows you to set the characters used to separate ingredients in the file name recipe by default. RELATED LINKS Exporting layouts as graphics files on page 525 Printers You can print layouts from Dorico Elements projects to any printer to which your computer is connected. You can select different printers for each layout in your project.
Print mode Page arrangements for printing/exporting Spreads Prints two pages on each sheet of paper, with odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side and even-numbered pages on the left-hand side. You can also specify a paper size on which to print odd final pages, for example, if you are printing a layout containing five pages. 2-up Prints two pages on each sheet of paper. The first page in the range is printed on the left-hand side of the first sheet of paper.
Print mode Duplex printing Booklet printing Booklets are documents printed on both sides of the paper and folded to resemble the pages in a book. When printed as a booklet, pages are reordered so that you can fold the printed pages and read the content in the same order as they were in the project. Printing layouts as a booklet can be much quicker than printing pages single-sided or doublesided.
Print mode Page sizes and paper sizes printer, a message box informs you to turn over the stack of printed pages and put them back into the printer. Click OK to continue printing the inward pages. Both sides automatically Prints on both sides of each sheet of paper automatically. This option is only available if your printer supports this type of printing. The other menus in the Duplex Printing section allow you to set how the printed image is flipped when printing on the reverse side of the paper.
Print mode Page sizes and paper sizes If you do not select a specific paper size, Dorico Elements automatically chooses a paper size that is based on your computer's locale settings. For example, if these are set to a European country, an international ISO standard might be used, such as A4. If they are set to a North American country, one of their typical standards might be used, such as US Letter.
Print mode Graphics file formats Print odd final page on For Spreads and 2-up job types only: If this is activated, you can select a different paper size or orientation for the odd final page. This setting is useful when printing layouts with an odd number of pages on A3 paper in landscape orientation. For example, if your layout contains five pages, the first four pages fit onto two sheets of A3, while the fifth page would occupy only the left-hand side of a third sheet of A3.
Print mode Graphics file formats Image resolution Image resolution refers to the number of pixels contained in an image. The larger the number of pixels, the sharper and clearer the image appears. In Dorico Elements, you can export PNG and TIFF files with different image resolutions. The image resolution is measured in dots per inch, or “dpi”.
Print mode Annotations Embedding of fonts in PDF and SVG files How fonts are handled in PDF and SVG files mainly depends on the fonts that you use in the project. PDF Files The music and text fonts, and their sub-sets, that are supplied with Dorico Elements are embedded in PDF files during the export. If you open the PDF files on a different computer, they look the same, even if that computer does not have the fonts installed that are used in the document.
Print mode Annotations Crop marks Adds short vertical and horizontal lines at each of the four corners of the page. Border Adds an outline around the edge of the page dimensions. Date and time Adds the date and time of printing at the bottom of each page. Watermark Adds large translucent text across the middle of each page. This is useful for indicating that this version is a draft, proof, or perusal score.
Notation reference
Introduction This notation reference contains information about the accepted conventions for presenting different notations and how to change their appearance and placement in Dorico Elements, both for individual items and by changing default settings. It also contains instructions for inputting more complex notations, such as cross-staff glissando lines, which are described in the corresponding chapter.
Accidentals Accidentals are shown beside notes to indicate their pitch, both when notated on a staff and written out in text. In music based in Western tonality, they usually show that the pitch of a note has been altered so that it does not conform to the current prevailing key signature. In Dorico Elements, each note has its own fixed pitch that is independent of the prevailing key signature, and accidentals are automatically hidden and shown as appropriate.
Accidentals Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing accidentals NOTE ● Deleting accidentals causes accidentals to appear on any subsequent notes of the same pitch in the same bar. You can check the pitch of notes by selecting them and looking in the status bar. ● To delete accidentals from a selection of notes with different accidentals, we recommend that you revert them all to natural by pressing 0 or clicking Natural in the Notes panel.
Accidentals Stacking of accidentals RELATED LINKS Preferences dialog on page 45 Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals on page 736 Deleting accidentals on page 541 Changing the property scope on page 149 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Stacking of accidentals If multiple accidentals are required for a chord in a single voice, or for notes in multiple voices at the same rhythmic position, they are stacked to the left of the chord in columns.
Accidentals Altered unisons NOTE By default for dense chords, Dorico Elements uses a lattice arrangement of accidentals rather than the usual zig-zag arrangement. In very dense chords, the lattice arrangement can be wider and require more columns. Kerning of accidental columns Dorico Elements applies kerning to accidental columns to ensure that the columns to the left of a chord occupy as little horizontal space as possible.
Accidentals Microtonal accidentals Changing how altered unisons appear You can change how individual altered unisons appear, including within chords containing other altered unisons. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the altered unison notes whose appearance you want to change. 2.
Accidentals Accidental duration rules RELATED LINKS Double accidental cancellation on page 546 Double accidental cancellation There are two generally accepted practices for the cancellation of double accidentals, which are archaic and modern. By default, Dorico Elements uses modern cancellation.
Articulations Articulations are markings that are drawn above or below notes and chords. Articulations tell a performer how to attack a note or how long to play a note relative to its notated duration. In Dorico Elements, articulations are defined as something that alters the way a note is played, in a way that is consistent across all instruments.
Articulations Changing articulations AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you want the copied notes to have the same rhythm but different pitches, you can repitch the notes. RELATED LINKS Repitching notes without changing their rhythm on page 201 Changing articulations You can change the articulations on notes after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the note whose articulation you want to change. 2.
Articulations Positions of articulations ● If multiple voices are active, articulations are placed at the end of the stem side of a note or chord. This clarifies which articulations belong to the up-stemmed notes and which to the down-stemmed notes. ● If a note is placed on the middle staff line or on the space immediately on either side, articulations that are less than a space in height are centered in the next unoccupied space. This normally only applies to staccato and tenuto.
Articulations Positions of articulations Force and stress articulations outside the ends of the Duration articulations inside the ends of the slur slur Changing the positions of articulations on tie chains You can change where in tie chains articulations appear individually. By default, articulations of force and stress are shown on the first note/chord in tie chains, while articulations of duration are shown on the last note/chord. PROCEDURE 1.
Articulations Articulations in playback RESULT The articulation is placed on the selected side of the notes or chords. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. If this creates a collision with other markings, such as playing techniques, Dorico Elements automatically makes adjustments to make sure all markings are clear and legible.
Articulations Articulations in playback RELATED LINKS Playback techniques on page 512 Enabling independent voice playback on page 460 552 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Bars Bars indicate a usually regular segment of time according to the number of beats, which is usually determined by the prevailing time signature. Bars are separated from other bars to the left and the right by vertical barlines. Each bar has a number, allowing players to keep track of their place in the music and aiding rehearsal. This is especially important in music for multiple players.
Bars Deleting bars/beats For example, enter –6 to delete six bars, meaning the bar you selected and the subsequent five bars, or -2q to delete two quarter note beats, starting from the selected rhythmic position. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT The number of bars or beats specified is deleted.
Bars Splits in bars 2. Press Shift-B to open the bars and barlines popover. 3. Enter trim into the popover. 4. Press Return to close the popover. RESULT Empty bars at the end of the selected flow are deleted. RELATED LINKS Bars and barlines popover on page 235 Splitting flows on page 355 Deleting the contents of bars You can delete just the contents of bars without deleting barlines or the bars themselves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the bars whose contents you want to delete.
Bars Combining bars Splitting bars by inputting new barlines You can also split bars by inputting new barlines that are not normal (single) barlines anywhere within a bar without affecting the time signature. However, inputting a normal (single) barline anywhere within an existing bar resets the prevailing time signature from that point onwards. For example, selecting the third quarter note (crotchet) in a 4/4 bar and inserting a new barline causes a new 4/4 bar to start from the added barline.
Bars Combining bars Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests on page 885 557 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Barlines Barlines are vertical lines that cross staves in order to show how music is divided into bars, according to the time signature. The most commonly used barline is the single barline between adjacent bars, but there are different types, such as double or repeat barlines. The final system in a piece in 12/8 containing, a key change with double barline, three normal barlines, and a final barline at the end Dorico Elements automatically shows barlines as required for the current time signature.
Barlines Types of barlines Final A final barline consists of two lines: one of normal width, the other thick. It marks where the music ends. Start repeat A start repeat line consists of a thick barline, followed by a normal barline, followed by one of the following arrangements of dots: ● Two dots, one each in the middle two spaces of a five-line staff ● Four dots, one each in all four spaces of a five-line staff It shows the start of a repeated section.
Barlines Deleting barlines Deleting barlines You can delete barlines without affecting the rhythmic positions of notes. For example, you might delete existing barlines and input new ones if you want to change where a barline occurs. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the barlines you want to delete. NOTE You must select barlines directly, not their signposts. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The barline is deleted.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups Barlines on individual staves Barlines across instrumental groups Barlines automatically extend across staff groups that are joined by a bracket or brace. Which staves are included in a bracket depends on the instrumentation and context, but usually staves for instruments from the same family, such as woodwind or strings, are bracketed together. Dorico Elements automatically brackets staves according to the ensemble type set for each layout.
Barlines Barlines across staff groups 2. In the Properties panel, activate Barline joins all staves in the Time Signatures group. RESULT All staves in the layout currently open in the music area are joined by a barline at the selected time signature changes. 562 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Bar numbers Bar numbers provide a crucial reference point for music that has multiple players, and make the chronological sequence of the music clear. They indicate where players are in the piece, which allows them to co-ordinate themselves easily in rehearsals and concerts. Bar numbers can also be useful when preparing parts and scores, as you can use bar numbers and rehearsal marks to help you quickly compare a part to the score and check the music is correct.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number enclosures ● Every bar ● None 5. Optional: If you chose Every n bars, set a custom frequency for bar numbers by changing the value for Interval. 6. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Bar numbers are hidden in the selected layouts when you choose None, and shown at the corresponding frequency when you choose any other option. Changing the Interval value changes how frequently bar numbers are shown.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests RESULT Bar numbers in the selected layouts are shown within your selected enclosure type. The size of the enclosure is relative to the font size of the bar numbers, but the size and shape of the enclosure are also determined by your padding values.
Bar numbers Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers Hiding/Showing guide bar numbers You can hide/show guide bar numbers on every bar and above every system in page view and galley view independently, for example, to make it easier to check the bar number in scores with many staves. Guide bar numbers are not printed. PROCEDURE ● Hide/Show guide bar numbers in any of the following ways: ● To hide/show guide bar numbers in page view, choose View > Bar Numbers > Page View.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers Positions of bar numbers Bar numbers are typically shown at the start of each system, above the staff, and aligned with the initial barline. You can change the default positions and frequency of bar numbers in each layout independently on the Bar Numbers page in Layout Options. For example, you might want to show bar numbers every bar in full score layouts but only at the start of each system in part layouts.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Bar Numbers in the category list. 4. In the Placement subsection, activate the checkbox for each player in the Show above specific players list above whose top staff you want to show bar numbers. 5.
Bar numbers Positions of bar numbers RESULT If you increase the values, bar numbers are positioned further away from the staff and/or other objects, either above or below the staff depending on your setting for Placement relative to staff. If you decrease the values, bar numbers are positioned closer to the staff and/or other objects.
Bar numbers Bar number changes By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Bar Numbers in the category list. 4. In the Showing and Hiding subsection, activate/deactivate Show bar numbers at time signatures at system object positions. 5. Click Apply, then Close.
Bar numbers Bar number changes Continue Primary Returns the bar number sequence to the Primary sequence without counting intervening bars, for example, after a section of bars following the Subordinate bar number sequence.
Bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers RESULT The bar number changes are deleted. Subsequent bars follow the previous bar number sequence until the next bar number change, or until the end of the flow. Subordinate bar numbers Subordinate bar numbers are useful for numbering repeat endings, and for situations when the music is being altered, but the original bar numbers cannot be changed.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats For example, if you start a subordinate bar number sequence from what was originally bar 5, the sequence starts from 4a and continues until the next specified bar number change, or until the end of the flow. Returning to the primary bar number sequence You can specify the point where you want to return to the primary bar number sequence after a section of subordinate bar numbers. PROCEDURE 1.
Bar numbers Bar numbers and repeats In Dorico Elements, you cannot automatically include repeats in the bar number count. However, you can add bar number changes manually if you want bar numbers to reflect the total number of bars played. RELATED LINKS Adding bar number changes on page 571 574 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Beaming A beam is a line that connects notes with tails to show rhythmic grouping, which varies according to the metrical structure of the current time signature. This way of grouping notes helps performers calculate quickly exactly how to play their given rhythm and helps them follow both their part and, if applicable, the conductor.
Beaming Beam groups Default eighth note beam grouping in 3/4 Default eighth note beam grouping in 6/8 Dorico Elements groups and beams notes in irregular time signatures, such as 5/8 or 7/8, according to the most common practices for those time signatures. Default beam grouping in 5/8 Default beam grouping in 7/8 For situations where you want to control the beat grouping in more detail, you can input a custom time signature with an explicit rhythmic subdivision.
Beaming Beaming notes together manually Beam grouping according to meters on page 575 Unbeaming notes on page 578 Resetting beam grouping You can remove all changes made to the beam grouping of notes and chords. This can also be useful if, for example, MusicXML files you have imported have incorrect beaming. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes/chords whose beaming you want to reset. 2. Choose Edit > Beaming > Reset Beaming. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Beaming Changing the direction of partial beams Unbeaming notes You can separate all notes in a beamed group so that each note shows its own tail, for example, when fast rhythms have syllabic text settings. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes you want to make unbeamed. 2. Choose Edit > Beaming > Make Unbeamed. You can also choose this option from the context menu. Changing the direction of partial beams Dorico Elements automatically inputs a partial beam if one is required.
Beaming Beam placement relative to the staff Changing the staff-relative placement of beams You can change the side of the staff on which beams appear by forcing the stem direction to change. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select at least one note in each of the beamed phrases whose staff-relative placement you want to change. 2.
Beaming Beam slants Beam slants The slant of a beam controls how steeply the beam deviates from horizontal, according to the pitches of the notes within the beamed group. ● When the last note of the phrase is higher than the first, the beam slants upwards. ● When the last note of the phrase is lower than the first, the beam slants downwards.
Beaming Centered beams 2. In the Properties panel, activate Beam direction in the Beaming group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Flat ● Up ● Down RESULT The slants of the selected beams are changed while retaining correct positions relative to staff lines. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Beaming Centered beams Creating centered beams You can make beams appear in the middle of staves, with high notes above the beam and lower notes below the beam. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE As this action requires changing the direction of some stems in order to appear correctly, it is located in the Stem submenu rather than Beaming in the Edit menu. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams TIP You can assign a key command for Remove Centered Beam on the Key Commands page in Preferences. Creating cross-staff beams Cross-staff beams work in a similar way to normal beams, but allow a phrase that covers a wide pitch range to be shown on two staves. You can create cross-staff beams by inputting all notes in the phrase on one staff and crossing some notes to appear on another staff. PREREQUISITE You have input a phrase on one staff. PROCEDURE 1.
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams EXAMPLE Notes shown on their original staves Cross-staff beams created by crossing some notes to the other staff RELATED LINKS Moving notes to other staves on page 353 Notes crossed to staves with existing notes in other voices on page 1001 Note positions in multiple-voice contexts on page 998 Changing the stem direction of notes on page 923 Changing to optical cross-staff beam spacing You can make the stems in cross-staff beams, rather than the noteheads, evenly spac
Beaming Creating cross-staff beams EXAMPLE Default spacing: The distance between noteheads is even. Optical spacing for cross-staff beaming: The distance between stems is even. RELATED LINKS Note spacing on page 406 Cross-staff beam placement in multiple staves When instruments have three or more staves, cross-staff beams can be placed in multiple ways. For example, the beam can be placed between the top and the middle staves, and also between the middle and bottom staves.
Beaming Beam corners 1 If all notes in the beam group are stem-up, the beam is placed above the top staff. 2 If all notes in the beam group are stem-down, the beam is placed below the bottom staff. 3 If notes are stem-down on the top staff and stem-up on the bottom two staves, the beam is placed between the top and middle staves. 4 If notes are stem-down on the top two staves and stem-up on the bottom staff, the beam is placed between the bottom and middle staves.
Beaming Secondary beams A phrase of 64th notes, with secondary beams subdivided to show 16th and eighth note groups Changing the number of beam lines in secondary beams You can change the number of beam lines shown in secondary beams individually. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes to the right of where you want to change the number of secondary beaming lines. 2.
Beaming Tuplets within beams Tuplets within beams Tuplets that contain notes that produce beams, such as eighth notes, are beamed together. However, special beam grouping rules apply to tuplets within beams that also contain non-tuplet notes. The default setting for a tuplet in a beamed group with secondary beams is to split the secondary beam and to show the tuplet with a bracket. The primary beam is not split. If necessary, you can hide/show tuplet brackets individually.
Beaming Fanned beams The grouping can use either two or three beams, with three beams indicating a greater change of speed than two beams. The slowest part of the phrase is where the beams converge, and the fastest is where the beams are the most spread out. In Dorico Elements, you cannot create fanned beams or change their direction. However, fanned beams are shown if you import or open a project that contains them.
Note and rest grouping There are generally accepted conventions for how notes and rests of different durations are notated and grouped in different contexts and meters. In Dorico Elements, notes are automatically notated to fit within bars. Depending on the prevailing time signature, there can be many different ways to beam notes together. For example, you might want to beam all notes in the bar together in time signatures that cannot be divided in half and are often not divided at all, such as 3/4.
Note and rest grouping Creating custom beat groupings for meters ● Select an item at the rhythmic position where you want to input a time signature with custom beat grouping. If you want to input a time signature with custom beat grouping on a single staff, select an item that belongs to that staff only. 2. Optional: If you want to input a time signature with custom beat grouping onto multiple specific staves at once, extend the caret to those staves. 3.
Brackets and braces Brackets and braces are thick straight and curved lines in the left-hand margin that show instrument groupings. Brackets A bracket is a thick black line, the width of a beam, that groups staves together, most commonly according to instrument family. It often has winged ends that point inwards towards the score. It is always positioned directly to the left of a systemic barline.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type A brace connecting two piano staves NOTE ● Staves cannot be bracketed and braced simultaneously. Therefore, braced staves are excluded from bracketed groups. They also cannot show sub-brackets or sub-sub-brackets. ● System objects are only shown above instrument families that are bracketed or braced together. ● Blank staves can only show brackets/braces when they are shown after final flows.
Brackets and braces Changing bracket grouping according to ensemble type ● 5. British brass band Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The default bracket grouping is changed in the selected layouts. TIP ● There are further options for bracketing on the Brackets and Braces page, such as hiding/ showing brackets when there is only a single instrument in the bracket group and hiding/ showing braces when only a single staff is shown.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets Rhythm section instruments are bracketed together. Percussion and timpani are bracketed together. British brass band Brass instruments are bracketed according to their instrument type, except for horns and trumpets, which are bracketed together. Any other instruments in the score are bracketed according to their instrument family. Percussion and timpani are bracketed separately.
Brackets and braces Secondary brackets NOTE You cannot show sub-sub-brackets in addition to braces, you can only show sub-sub-brackets in addition to sub-brackets. Hiding/Showing secondary brackets You can hide/show secondary brackets for adjacent identical instruments in bracketed groups in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show secondary brackets.
Brackets and braces Sub-sub-brackets RESULT The appearance of all secondary brackets in the selected layouts is changed. NOTE Because you cannot show sub-sub-brackets in addition to braces, sub-sub-brackets are not shown in layouts where sub-brackets appear as braces. Sub-sub-brackets Sub-sub-brackets are a tertiary level of staff grouping with the same design as sub-brackets.
Chord symbols Chord symbols describe the vertical harmony of the music at a specific moment. They are frequently used in jazz and pop music, where players often improvise around chord progressions. Chord symbols shown above slashes on the Clarinet and Piano staves to help the players improvise around the notated Cornet melody. In Dorico Elements, chord symbols exist globally at the corresponding rhythmic positions by default.
Chord symbols Chord components Chord components Chord symbols consist of a root and a quality, with intervals, alterations, and an altered bass note included if required. Root The root note of the chord, expressed either as a note name or as a specific degree of a scale. Quality Defines the type of chord, such as major, minor, diminished, augmented, halfdiminished, or with added note, such as six or nine. Interval Chord symbols can include one or more added intervals, such as a major seventh or ninth.
Chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord symbols Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 127 Making layouts transposing/concert pitch on page 127 Respelling chord symbols on page 606 Hiding/Showing chord symbols You can hide/show chord symbols above particular staves or only within chord symbol/slash regions project-wide on a per-player basis. By default, chord symbols appear above rhythm section instrument staves, such as keyboards, guitars, and bass guitars.
Chord symbols Hiding/Showing the root and quality of chord symbols Key Commands page in the Preferences dialog on page 47 Hiding/Showing chord symbols in layouts You can hide/show chord symbols in different types of layouts. By default, chord symbols appear in all applicable layouts for rhythm section instruments. NOTE If chord symbols are hidden for all instruments in the current layout, signposts are shown above the top staff. PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, select a player in the Players panel. 2.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions common to use both slashes and chord symbols to aid players in improvisation sections. Any chord symbols outside chord symbol/slash regions are automatically hidden and are indicated by signposts. By default, chord symbol regions are highlighted with a solid colored line above the top staff line and a colored background. As you zoom out, the colored backgrounds become more opaque, which is especially useful when viewing full score layouts in galley view.
Chord symbols Chord symbol regions RESULT The selected chord symbol regions are moved to new rhythmic positions according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. NOTE Only one chord symbol region can exist at each rhythmic position. If any part of a selected chord symbol region collides with any part of another chord symbol region as part of its move, the other chord symbol region is shortened to accommodate the one you moved.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Hiding/Showing chord symbol region highlights You can hide/show colored highlights for chord symbol regions at any time, for example, if you want to show the highlights when inputting music but hide them when engraving. NOTE This does not affect the solid line shown above the staff in chord symbol regions, which you cannot hide. PROCEDURE ● Choose View > Highlight Chord Symbol Regions.
Chord symbols Positions of chord symbols Showing chord symbols above one/multiple staves You can choose to show chord symbols above all instrument staves set to show chord symbols or only above the top staff in each system in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the vertical position of chord symbols.
Chord symbols Respelling chord symbols NOTE Only one chord symbol can exist at each rhythmic position. If a chord symbol passes over another chord symbol as part of its move, the existing chord symbol is deleted. You can undo this action, but any chord symbols deleted in the process are only restored if you moved the chord symbol using the keyboard.
Chord symbols Chord symbols imported from MusicXML RESULT The selected chord symbols are respelled according to the selected mode. This does not affect the notes included in the chord symbols. Resetting the enharmonic spelling of chord symbols You can remove enharmonic spelling overrides for chord symbols you have respelled and return them to their default spelling. You can remove overrides for instruments with a single transposition only, such as instruments in B♭, or for all instrument transpositions.
Chord diagrams Chord diagrams represent the pattern of strings and frets on fretted instruments and use dots to indicate the stopped finger positions required to produce the corresponding chord. This demonstrates the specific shape of chords in a compact way and is useful if a particular voicing is required. In Dorico Elements, chord diagrams are part of chord symbols, meaning you can show them below chord symbols wherever they are shown.
Chord diagrams Chord diagram components Chord diagram components Chord diagrams use a combination of symbols, dots, and lines to convey the information about strings, fret positions, and finger positions that performers require to play the corresponding chord. 1 Omitted string Indicates a string that must not sound. 2 Open string Indicates a string that must sound but must be left open, that is, not stopped.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids PROCEDURE 1. In Setup mode, select a player in the Players panel for whom you want to hide/show chord diagrams. 2. Right-click the player and choose one of the following options from the context menu: ● To show chord diagrams, choose Chord Diagrams > [Fretted instrument and tuning]. For example, to show chord diagrams for a guitar in DADGAD tuning, choose Chord Diagrams > DADGAD guitar tuning.
Chord diagrams Hiding/Showing used chord diagrams grids PREREQUISITE ● If you want to show chord diagrams using a custom fretted instrument tuning, you have imported the tuning or changed the tuning of a fretted instrument in the project accordingly. ● We recommend that you have input chord symbols and changed the shape of any chord symbols you want to appear with a specific voicing.
Chord diagrams Changing the chord diagram shape Creating new chord diagram shapes on page 613 Changing page margins on page 369 Changing the chord diagram shape You can change the chord diagram shape shown at individual rhythmic positions, for example, if you require a shape with a different voicing. Many chords have multiple playable shapes. You can also apply your changes to all other instances of the same chord for instruments with compatible tunings. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes The Choose Chord Diagram dialog comprises the following: 1 Available chord diagrams Displays all the valid chord diagram shapes for the selected chord and allows you to select a different shape to show at the selected rhythmic position. Shapes you have created yourself appear in a different color.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes RESULT The new shape is saved and is used for the selected chord diagram. The new shape also becomes available for any other chord for which it is valid. Edit Chord Diagram dialog The Edit Chord Diagram dialog allows you to edit the shape of individual chord diagrams, including changing the number of frets shown, stopped fret positions, and the starting fret number.
Chord diagrams Creating new chord diagram shapes 4 Notes not in chord diagram Displays any pitches that are part of the chord but not currently included in the chord diagram. 5 Open string pitch Displays the open pitch of the corresponding string for reference. 6 Current string pitch Displays the current pitch of the corresponding string if it is open or stopped. If the pitch of a string is not part of the chord, the string pitch appears red.
Clefs Clefs are the symbol at the start of every system that give the notes on the staff context; that is, the clef tells you which note of the scale applies to each line or space of the staff. For example, the treble clef is also known as a “G clef”, because the spiral shape in the middle centers around G, normally the one above middle C. The other common clefs are: ● The bass clef, or F clef, in which two dots are shown either side of the line corresponding to F, normally the F below middle C.
Clefs General placement conventions for clefs General placement conventions for clefs Clefs are placed at the start of every system, with a small gap between the start of the staff and the left edge of the clef. Their vertical placement must be precise, as this signifies which pitches are intended by the subsequent notes on the staff. Clef changes that occur during a piece are usually smaller than the clefs shown at the start of each system.
Clefs Showing clefs after grace notes Showing clefs after grace notes According to convention, clefs are positioned before grace notes so this is the default in Dorico Elements. However, in some circumstances you might want to position clefs between grace notes and normal notes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the clefs you want to show after grace notes. 2. Choose Edit > Clef Position > After Grace Notes. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Clefs Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch RESULT The selected clefs are deleted. Any music on the staff is respelled according to the previous clef, up until the next existing clef or the end of the flow. RELATED LINKS Input methods for clefs and octave lines on page 256 Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch You can set clef changes to show a different clef in concert pitch layouts compared to transposed pitch layouts.
Clefs Changing the octave of clefs scores to avoid excess ledger lines, but do not require those clef changes in their transposed pitch parts. By default, all clefs appear in all layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Select the clefs or signposts of clefs you want to hide/show according to the layout transposition. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Show for transposition in the Clefs group. 3.
Clefs Clefs with octave indicators RELATED LINKS Concert vs. transposed pitch on page 127 Setting different clefs for concert/transposed pitch on page 619 Clefs with octave indicators Clefs with octave indicators indicate that notes are played in a different register to the one notated. An octave indicator above the clef indicates that notes are played higher than notated, while an octave indicator below the clef indicates that notes are played lower than notated.
Octave lines Octave lines indicate where notes are played higher/lower than they appear in the score or part. They are dashed or dotted horizontal lines with an italic numeral at the start. The numeral indicates the number of pitches by which the phrase is changed, such as 8 for one octave and 15 for two octaves. Octave lines that indicate notes are played higher than notated are placed above the staff, while octave lines that indicate notes are played lower than notated are placed below the staff.
Octave lines Lengthening/Shortening octave lines Lengthening/Shortening octave lines You can lengthen/shorten octave lines after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the octave lines you want to lengthen/shorten. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only lengthen/shorten one octave line at a time. 2. Lengthen/Shorten the selected octave lines in any of the following ways: ● To lengthen them by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptRight Arrow .
Octave lines Positions of octave lines Moving octave lines rhythmically You can move octave lines to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the octave lines you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one octave line rhythmically at a time. 2.
Octave lines Positions of octave lines Changing the alignment of octave line numerals relative to notes You can change whether the left edge, center, or right edge of individual octave line numerals is aligned with the first note to which each octave line applies. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Octave lines Deleting octave lines Deleting octave lines You can delete octave lines without deleting notes and other items. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the octave lines you want to delete. 2. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT The selected octave lines are deleted. Any notes to which the deleted octave lines previously applied are shown at either concert pitch or transposed pitch, depending on your current setting for the layout.
Cues Cues are passages of music shown in instrumental parts that are played by a different player, usually to help orientate players before entries or solos following a significant passage of rests. Cues can also be used to assist with co-ordination or tuning between players, or to indicate material that the player might be asked to double. A cue in a timpani part showing music from the bassoons NOTE In Dorico Elements, you cannot input or edit cues.
Dynamics Dynamics indicate the loudness of the music, and can be combined with other instructions to give the performer a detailed understanding of how to perform the music, while also leaving room for interpretation. Dynamics can indicate an immediate change in volume or a gradual change over a specified duration. By default, they are placed below the staff for instruments and above the staff for voices.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics In Dorico Elements, a hairpin can be shown as messa di voce, which shows a pair of hairpins. In some cases, this is easier than having separate lines for each half of the pair. Force/Intensity of attack These dynamics, such as and , indicate that a note has a stronger attack than is usually expected for the dynamic, similar to an accent articulation. Combined dynamics Combined dynamics, such as or –, specify a sudden change of dynamic.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics Changing the horizontal beat-relative position of dynamics You can position individual dynamics before or after the beat. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the dynamics whose position relative to the beat you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Beat-relative position in the Dynamics group. 3.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics ● Align optical center with left of notehead RESULT The alignment of the selected immediate dynamics is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Moving dynamics rhythmically You can move dynamics to new rhythmic positions after they have been input, including within tie chains. NOTE If you want to move a single dynamic within a group, you must click and drag it with the mouse.
Dynamics Positions of dynamics RELATED LINKS Moving dynamic points on page 435 Lengthening/Shortening gradual dynamics and groups of dynamics on page 642 General placement conventions for hairpins relative to barlines In Dorico Elements, the ends of hairpins align with the left edge of the note to their right. This can include hairpins extending across barlines.
Dynamics Showing dynamics in parentheses ● Continue RESULT The selected hairpins are allowed across barlines when you choose Continue, and disallowed when you choose Stop before. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Dynamics Hiding/Showing immediate dynamics TIP You can assign key commands for these options on the Key Commands page in Preferences.
Dynamics Changing the appearance of sforzando/rinforzando dynamics PROCEDURE 1. Select the combined dynamics whose separator you want to hide/show. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Separator shown in the Dynamics group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. 4.
Dynamics Copying dynamics Changing the appearance/position of subito modifiers on page 640 Copying dynamics You can copy dynamics to other rhythmic positions after they have been input. You can select dynamics on a single staff to copy to another single staff, or you can select dynamics across multiple staves to copy across the same number of staves. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the dynamics you want to copy.
Dynamics Voice-specific dynamics RESULT The selected dynamics are deleted. If you delete immediate dynamics immediately before/after hairpins, the length of hairpins can adjust automatically, depending on the context. NOTE Deleting dynamics that are linked to other staves can cause the selected dynamics to be deleted from all linked staves as well. If you do not select and delete all dynamics in the group, the selected dynamics are also deleted from all linked staves.
Dynamics Niente hairpins the dynamics popover and by clicking niente in the Gradual Dynamics section of the Dynamics panel. TIP You can turn existing hairpins into niente hairpins by selecting them and clicking niente in the Gradual Dynamics section of the Dynamics panel, or by activating Niente in the Dynamics group of the Properties panel.
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Dynamic modifiers Modifiers add further detail to dynamics than simply their volume level, and can help guide how a player performs a note or phrase. Modifiers include poco a poco, molto and subito. They are also known as “expressive text”. In Dorico Elements, modifiers must accompany a dynamic level, such as or .
Dynamics Dynamic modifiers AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If you added modifiers to hairpins, you can show them centered inside the hairpins. RELATED LINKS Niente hairpins on page 637 Input methods for dynamics on page 243 Showing modifiers centered inside hairpins on page 640 Adding poco a poco text to gradual dynamics on page 644 Changing the appearance/position of subito modifiers You can change the appearance and/or position of individual subito modifiers.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, modifiers appear at the start of and either above or below hairpins. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the hairpins whose modifiers you want to show centered inside hairpins. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Modifier position in the Dynamics group. 3.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics RELATED LINKS Input methods for dynamics on page 243 Types of dynamics on page 628 Changing the appearance of gradual dynamics on page 643 General placement conventions for hairpins relative to barlines on page 632 Lengthening/Shortening gradual dynamics and groups of dynamics You can change the length of gradual dynamics and groups of dynamics after they have been input. NOTE You can only lengthen/shorten one gradual dynamic or group of dynamics at a time. PROCEDURE 1. 2.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics EXAMPLE Original dynamic phrase Lengthened dynamic phrase RELATED LINKS Groups of dynamics on page 647 Moving dynamics rhythmically on page 631 Ungrouping dynamics and removing dynamics from groups on page 648 Changing the appearance of gradual dynamics You can change the appearance of individual gradual dynamics, for example, to change a crescendo hairpin to a messa di voce pair of hairpins with two directions or to show a particularly long crescendo using “cresc.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics EXAMPLE Hairpin cresc./dim. cresc…. cre - scen - do Hiding/Showing flared ends on hairpins Flared ends are usually shown at the end of crescendo hairpins and indicate a sudden burst in volume at the end of the crescendo. You can hide/show flared ends on any hairpin. NOTE You can only show flared ends on hairpins with solid lines. PROCEDURE 1. Select the hairpins on which you want to hide/show flared ends. 2.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics EXAMPLE Text gradual dynamic with poco a poco Hairpin gradual dynamic with poco a poco AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can show poco a poco text centered inside hairpins. RELATED LINKS Dynamic modifiers on page 639 Showing modifiers centered inside hairpins on page 640 Gradual dynamic spacing Dorico Elements ensures that hairpins can always be clearly distinguished by giving hairpins a minimum default length. However, this can affect note spacing.
Dynamics Gradual dynamics Gradual dynamics truncated by immediate dynamics A hairpin is automatically truncated if an immediate dynamic is positioned within its range, either before or after the hairpin is input. The hairpin remains tied to its originally designated rhythmic positions, even if graphically it appears shorter. This means that if the immediate dynamic that truncated it is ever deleted, the hairpin extends up to its end or the next immediate dynamic within its range.
Dynamics Groups of dynamics Groups of dynamics Groups of dynamics are automatically aligned in a row and can be moved and edited as a group. When you move immediate dynamics within a group, the length of the hairpins on either side automatically adjust to compensate. A group of dynamics The same group of dynamics adjusts to compensate when the middle dynamic moves rhythmically. A single dynamic, either immediate or gradual, is considered a group on its own.
Dynamics Linked dynamics RESULT The selected dynamics are grouped together. If the first dynamic in the group is linked to other staves, all dynamics in the group are added to those staves. This applies to all layouts in which the dynamics appear. RELATED LINKS Linked dynamics on page 648 Ungrouping dynamics and removing dynamics from groups You can ungroup dynamics so that all dynamics in the group become ungrouped.
Dynamics Linked dynamics If one staff has another immediate dynamic before the end of a hairpin, the hairpin is truncated automatically. If you delete such a dynamic, the hairpin extends automatically up to the next immediate dynamic or to its full length, whichever comes first. Two staves with linked dynamics, but the lower staff has another immediate dynamic that truncates the hairpin.
Dynamics VST Expression Maps for volume types RELATED LINKS Copying dynamics on page 636 Unlinking dynamics You can unlink dynamics, including dynamics that were linked automatically. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a dynamic in each linked group that you want to unlink. 2. Choose Edit > Dynamics > Unlink. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT All dynamics in the linked groups are unlinked. This applies to all layouts in which the dynamics appear.
Figured bass Figured bass is a shorthand that uses figures to specify the harmony above the notated bass notes. It is particularly common in Baroque and early Classical music and in the parts of accompanying instruments, such as harpsichords and viols. Figured bass informs performers about the intended harmony but allows room for interpretation, such as improvised arpeggiated phrases using notes from the chord.
Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts Appearance of figured bass on page 657 Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts You can hide/show figured bass in each layout independently and only above the staves of specific players. For example, you can show figured bass in the full score and bass part layouts but hide figured bass in the other part layouts. Any player on whose staff you input figured bass is automatically set to show figured bass in the current layout. PROCEDURE 1.
Figured bass Showing figured bass on rests RESULT The selected figured bass figures are hidden when Hidden is activated, and shown when it is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Signposts are shown at the position of each hidden figure. However, signposts are not printed by default. TIP ● If you do not want to show figured bass signposts, choose View > Signposts > Figured Bass.
Figured bass Lengthening/Shortening figured bass figures Lengthening/Shortening figured bass figures You can lengthen/shorten the duration of figured bass figures after they have been input. Lengthening a figure that was input without a specified duration gives it duration and shows a hold line. Hold lines indicate that chords remain the same over changing notes in the bass. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the figured bass figures you want to lengthen/shorten.
Figured bass Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines EXAMPLE Figure (selected) with no duration Figure (selected) with duration and hold line Hiding/Showing figured bass suspension hold lines You can hide/show hold lines between the figures at the start and end of figured bass suspensions individually. PROCEDURE 1. Select the figured bass suspensions whose hold lines you want to hide/show. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line between susp. and resolution in the Figured Bass group. 3.
Figured bass Positions of figured bass RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing figured bass in layouts on page 652 Moving figured bass figures rhythmically on page 657 Changing the staff-relative placement of figured bass You can change the default staff-relative placement of all figured bass figures in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the staff-relative placement of figured bass.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Moving figured bass figures rhythmically You can move figured bass figures to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the figured bass figures you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one figure rhythmically at a time. 2. Move the figures according to the current rhythmic grid resolution in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass Simplifying figured bass compound intervals on page 658 Fixing the current appearance of figured bass on page 658 Resetting figured bass on page 659 Simplifying figured bass compound intervals You can simplify compound intervals in individual figured bass figures, that is, figures 9 and above. Some editions prefer to simplify compound intervals so figures reflect the first octave and appear out of order in the stack. PROCEDURE 1.
Figured bass Appearance of figured bass ● You can assign a key command for Force Current Appearance on the Key Commands page in Preferences. Resetting figured bass You can reset individual figured bass figures, for example, if they were input with the figured bass input setting Follow input literally. Reset figures follow the default settings in Dorico Elements, which you cannot change in Dorico Elements. PROCEDURE 1. Select the figured bass figures you want to reset. 2.
Fingering Fingerings can be added to music to recommend which fingers players should use for notes. This can be useful for music aimed at players learning the instrument and for difficult musical passages where certain fingering patterns make the notes much easier to play. Fingerings are often used in keyboard music, as players can use all ten fingers to play notes, and in guitar music, where fingerings are often used alongside fret positions.
Fingering General placement conventions for fingering General placement conventions for fingering Fingerings are placed as close as possible to the notes to which they apply, so the performer can read them easily and clearly. In music for grand staff instruments, such as the piano and harp, it is accepted to place fingerings for the right hand above the top staff, and fingerings for the left hand below the bottom staff.
Fingering Changing existing fingerings Changing the rhythmic position of substitution fingerings Substitution fingerings are shown as immediate by default, meaning that the substitution takes place on the same note, but you can change the rhythmic position at which individual substitutions take place. PROCEDURE 1. Select the substitution fingering whose deferred rhythmic position you want to change. 2.
Fingering Changing the staff-relative placement of fingerings RESULT The selected fingerings are changed. TIP You can also change existing fingerings in Write mode by opening the fingerings popover. Any existing fingerings on the selected note are shown in the popover.
Fingering Hiding/Showing fingering Showing fingerings inside the staff You can show individual fingerings belonging to non-fretted instruments beside noteheads inside the staff. NOTE ● These steps only apply to non-fretted instruments. Left-hand fingerings for fretted instruments are shown inside the staff by default. ● These steps do not apply to substitution fingerings. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose fingerings you want to show inside the staff. 2.
Fingering Deleting fingerings Deleting fingerings You can remove fingerings from notes after you have input them. However, because fingerings are properties of notes rather than separate items in Dorico Elements, you cannot select and delete them as you would for other items. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes from which you want to remove fingerings. 2. Choose Edit > Fingering > Reset Fingering. RESULT All fingerings are removed from the selected notes.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments A passage for guitar with right-hand and left-hand fingerings Right-hand fingering Right-hand fingerings tell the performer which finger to use to pluck the string, which is usually the right hand. By default, all right-hand fingerings are placed outside the staff, on the notehead side of notes, and follow the stem directions of voices in multiple-voice contexts.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Hiding/Showing brackets for right-hand fingerings When multiple notes in the same chord are plucked by the same right-hand finger, you can show the same fingering multiple times, once for each note, or show a single fingering for all notes with a bracket spanning the notes plucked by that finger. When showing a separate fingering for each note, you can also choose to place each fingering either above or below the staff.
Fingering Fingerings for fretted instruments Changing the position of left-hand fingerings You can change the position of individual left-hand fingerings. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, they are positioned inside the staff and to the left of the notes to which they apply. NOTE These steps only apply to left-hand fingerings belonging to fretted instruments.
Fingering Fingering slides PREREQUISITE You have input the arpeggio signs to which you want to add fingerings. PROCEDURE 1. Select the arpeggio signs belonging to fretted instruments to which you to add fingerings. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Finger in the Plucked Fingering group. 3. Enter the fingering you want into the value field. For example, for the thumb, enter p. RESULT The specified fingering is added to the selected arpeggio signs.
Fingering Fingerings for valved brass instruments Fingering slides automatically avoid obstructions, such as noteheads, accidentals, and other fingerings. NOTE ● Dorico Elements automatically adjusts the length/angle of fingering slides when you move the fingerings at the start/end. ● In Dorico Elements, you can only show fingering slides on staves belonging to fretted instruments. You can show string fingering shift indicators on staves belonging to other string instruments.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators By default, Dorico Elements automatically stacks fingerings added to notes on brass instrument staves vertically. They are shown with no separator by default. RELATED LINKS Fingerings popover on page 214 Inputting fingerings on page 212 Showing horn branch indicators You can indicate the branch on which notes are played for double horns and triple horns by adding branch indicators as prefixes to horn fingerings.
Fingering Hiding/Showing string fingering shift indicators PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes on string instrument staves from which you want to indicate a fingering shift. 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Indicate shift to next note in the Fingering and Positions group. RESULT Shift indicators are shown when the property is activated, even if neither of the notes at each end have explicit fingerings, and hidden when the property is deactivated.
Fingering Fingerings imported from MusicXML files Fingerings imported from MusicXML files Dorico Elements imports fingerings that are specified using the fingering element in MusicXML files. MusicXML files exported from Finale typically represent fingerings in the correct way. However, because Sibelius does not use the fingering element, Dorico Elements cannot import fingerings from MusicXML files exported by Sibelius. 673 Dorico Elements 3.5.
String indicators String indicators are commonly used in guitar music to tell performers the string on which they should play a note, particularly for pitches that are possible on multiple strings. String indicators show the string number inside a circle enclosure, optionally with a dashed line to indicate they apply to a range of notes. Open pitches commonly appear as a zero without an enclosure.
String indicators Lengthening/Shortening string indicators In Dorico Elements, string indicators inside the staff are considered properties of the corresponding notes. You cannot select them independently of their corresponding notes.
String indicators Deleting string indicators moving them rhythmically, or by clicking and dragging the start handle once they have duration. ● Click and drag the circular handle at the start/end to the right/left. RESULT Single string indicators are lengthened/shortened according to the current rhythmic grid resolution or to the next/previous notehead, whichever is closer. If they previously had no duration, they now have duration and show a duration line.
String indicators Positions of string indicators RESULT String indicators inside the staff are removed from the selected notes. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
String indicators Positions of string indicators NOTE When multiple string indicators are selected, you can only move them according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. ● Click and drag the string indicator to the right/left to the notehead you want. RESULT The selected string indicators are moved to new rhythmic positions.
String indicators Positions of string indicators EXAMPLE String indicators to the left of noteheads String indicators to the right of noteheads RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 149 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 679 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Front matter Front matter in Dorico Elements is a broad term that covers all information included before the first bar of music in scores.
Front matter Project information used in default master pages Text tokens on page 397 Hiding/Showing flow headings on page 379 681 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Grace notes Grace notes are notes without a fixed duration, which are intended to be played quickly. They are scaled-down versions of normal notes, and are commonly shown with a slash through their stem. Grace notes with slashed stems are known as acciaccaturas and are often played very fast. Grace notes without slashed stems are known as appoggiaturas and are often played slower than acciaccaturas.
Grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes General placement conventions for grace notes Grace notes function like normal notes in many ways, but there are some specific conventions about their stem direction, position relative to noteheads, and the placement of stem slashes. Grace notes appear stem up by default, except when there are multiple voices with grace notes in a single staff, in which case grace notes in the lower voices appear stem down.
Grace notes Showing grace notes before/after barlines RELATED LINKS Changing the stem direction of notes on page 923 Slur placement relative to grace notes on page 889 Showing grace notes before/after barlines By default, grace notes are positioned after barlines and directly before the notehead to which they apply, including for the first note in a bar.
Grace notes Grace note stems very fast. Grace notes without slashed stems are known as appoggiaturas and are often played slower than acciaccaturas. In Dorico Elements, grace notes appear with slashed stems by default. You can change whether grace notes are slashed or unslashed during note input as well as by changing the type of existing grace notes. Changing the type of grace notes You can change the type of individual grace notes after they have been input.
Grace notes Grace note beams Grace note beams Dorico Elements automatically beams multiple adjacent grace notes together if they are an eighth note (quaver) or shorter in duration. Like all beams, grace note beams ideally follow the accepted standards for beam placement relative to staff lines, in order to avoid wedges. However, because grace notes are smaller than normal notes, this can lead to extreme slants in grace note beams.
Holds and pauses Different notations are used to show where the established rhythmic flow of the music is interrupted, either with a moment of repose or a short silence, before continuing. The most subtle effect is produced by a tenuto mark, with more significant effects denoted with holds and pauses. The duration of the break in the music intended by the hold or pause does not need to be specified.
Holds and pauses Types of holds and pauses Fermata Description Short fermata (Henze) Indicates that a note is held a little bit longer than the rhythm indicates, as used by Hans Werner Henze. Fermata Indicates that a note is held for longer than the rhythm indicates. Long fermata Indicates that a note is held quite a lot longer than the rhythm indicates. Long fermata (Henze) Indicates that a note is held quite a lot longer than the rhythm indicates, as used by Hans Werner Henze.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Types of caesuras There are different types of caesuras available in Dorico Elements. All caesuras indicate a break in sound, but different types are often needed for different styles of musical scores.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Caesuras Caesuras are positioned at the top of the staff, with the top staff line passing through the middle of the caesura and the bottom of the caesura resting on the second staff line. They are commonly placed at the end of a bar, before the barline. Caesuras are automatically added to all staves at the same rhythmic position, immediately to the left of the notehead or barline to which they were input.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Moving holds and pauses rhythmically You can move holds and pauses to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the holds and pauses you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one hold or pause rhythmically at a time. 2. Move the holds and pauses according to the current rhythmic grid resolution in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right.
Holds and pauses Positions of holds and pauses Positioning fermatas on barlines You can position individual fermatas over a barline instead of over a note to indicate a gap before the start of the following bar. NOTE Fermatas cannot be positioned on barlines if Max. fermatas per staff is also activated. PROCEDURE 1. Select the fermatas you want to position over barlines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Attach to barline in the Holds and Pauses group.
Key signatures Key signatures are the markings that show the current key of music by indicating which notes in the scale for that key are sharpened or flattened. They are shown at the start of each system on every applicable staff. Traditionally, accidentals are organized following the pattern of the circle of fifths, which is different for sharp keys and flat keys.
Key signatures Types of key signatures Clef Arrangement of sharps Arrangement of flats Treble Bass Alto Tenor RELATED LINKS Positions of key signatures on page 696 Types of key signatures There are multiple types of key signatures in Dorico Elements, which can all be input, moved, and deleted in the same ways. Major and minor key signatures The key signature for a major key appears the same as the key signature for its relative minor, and vice versa.
Key signatures Deleting key signatures preferred. There is no hierarchy of pitches in an open key signature, so the same pitch might be spelled differently each time it appears depending on its context, even within a few bars. In a C major or A minor key signature, accidentals are spelled based on the context of the major or minor tonality implied. For example, in C major, sharps in general are preferred, whether the music is going up or going down.
Key signatures Multiple simultaneous key signatures RELATED LINKS Input methods for key signatures on page 216 Adding instruments to players on page 105 Changing instruments on page 107 Signposts on page 349 Multiple simultaneous key signatures You can have multiple key signatures simultaneously by inputting each one onto a single staff. NOTE You do not have to input multiple simultaneous key signatures if you have transposing instruments in your score.
Key signatures Transposing key signatures alongside selections Moving key signatures rhythmically on page 697 Moving key signatures rhythmically You can move key signatures to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the key signatures you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one key signature rhythmically at a time. 2.
Key signatures Enharmonic equivalent key signatures TIP 4. ● We recommend using the Calculate interval section to determine your required settings, for example, if you want to transpose from G♭ major to G major. ● Different intervals have different possible qualities. For example, you can specify a major third but not a major octave. Therefore, if you want to set your transposition parameters manually, we recommend selecting the interval before the quality. Activate Transpose key signatures.
Key signatures Cautionary key signatures G♯ major requires a double sharp leading note A♭ major, the enharmonic equivalent to G♯, does not require a double sharp leading note By default, Dorico Elements selects an enharmonic equivalent key signature if it has fewer accidentals. How key signatures affect transposing instruments If there is a key signature in the full score, it is transposed for a transposing instrument by the same degree as the transposing interval for the instrument.
Key signatures Tonality systems Tonality systems The term “tonality system” is used in Dorico Elements to encompass three crucial elements that together make up the concept of tonality. The three elements that make up tonality systems are: ● A number of equal divisions of the octave, or EDO. For example, standard Western scales with half-step (semitone) steps have 12-EDO. ● A set of accidentals. This allows you to notate how much a note is raised or lowered. ● A key signature.
Lyrics In Dorico Elements, the term lyrics is used for all text that is sung by singers. To differentiate sung text from any other forms of text that often appear in musical scores, other forms of text are referred to as performance instructions, tempos, dynamics, and so on. Lyrics for a soprano duet with basso continuo accompaniment In Dorico Elements, lyrics were designed so that it is simple to make changes to existing lyrics without having to re-input new lyrics each time.
Lyrics Filters for lyrics The horizontal spacing of lyrics must be wide enough so that words or syllables do not overlap with the words or syllables on either side. For this reason, note spacing must sometimes be adjusted to accommodate lyrics. To reduce how severely the note spacing is changed to accommodate lyrics, which can distort the appearance of rhythms, Dorico Elements allows the alignment of some lyrics to be adjusted relative to their corresponding notes.
Lyrics Types of lyrics Below Staff Selects all lyrics below the staff in the current selection. You can use this filter in addition to the other filters. For example, you can filter first by line number, and then filter again by staff-relative placement. Chorus Selects all chorus lyrics in the current selection. Translations Selects all translation lyrics in the current selection.
Lyrics Types of syllables in lyrics You can input all types of lyrics using the lyrics popover. The icon shown on the left-hand side of the popover indicates the type of lyric currently being input. RELATED LINKS Lyric line numbers on page 712 Changing the line number and type of lyric lines on page 713 Lyrics popover on page 311 Changing the type of individual lyrics You can change the type of individual lyrics after they have been input.
Lyrics Types of syllables in lyrics Start Lyrics are considered the start syllable in a multi-syllabic word if the lyric comes after a gap, but is followed by a hyphen. Hyphens are shown after start lyrics, which can be continuation hyphens depending on the distance before the next lyric in the same lyric line. Middle Lyrics are considered the middle syllable in a multi-syllabic word if the lyric comes after a hyphen, and is followed by a hyphen.
Lyrics Deleting lyric lines Deleting lyric lines You can delete whole lines of lyrics. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the staves from which you want to delete a whole lyric line. 2. Select just the lyric line you want to delete by choosing Edit > Filter > Lyrics > [Lyrics type]. 3. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT All lyrics in the selected lyric line are deleted.
Lyrics Copying/Pasting lyrics NOTE ● If you are copying existing lyrics/text in Dorico Elements, you must be in Write mode. ● If you want to select many existing lyrics in Dorico Elements, you can use filters for lyric lines or you can select a single lyric and press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-A multiple times to select the rest of the lyrics in the lyric line. 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd-C to copy the selected lyrics/text. 3. In Write mode, select the first note in the voice to which you want to copy lyrics. 4.
Lyrics Lyric text editing Lyric text editing Proofreading lyrics can be challenging, because lyrics are spaced more widely than regular text and individual words are often split up over large horizontal distances. In Dorico Elements, you can change the text of individual words/syllables within the lyrics popover and also by viewing entire lyric lines in a single dialog. Editing existing lyrics You can change the text of lyrics after they have been input, for example, to correct misspellings.
Lyrics Lyric text editing The dialog shows all lyrics in the same lyric line as the selected lyric and allows you to edit the lyrics, such as fixing misspellings, adding commas, or changing where in a word the hyphen is placed. If you selected multiple lyrics to open the dialog, Dorico Elements populates the dialog with the lyric line of the earliest lyric on the highest staff you selected.
Lyrics Showing lyrics in italics Showing lyrics in italics You can show individual lyrics in an italic font without changing their font style, lyric type, or staff-relative placement. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics you want to show in an italic font. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Italic in the Lyrics group.
Lyrics Positions of lyrics Placement of lyric lines Lyrics are placed relative to other lyric lines according to their line number. For example, lyrics in Line 1 are placed at the top, including when there are multiple lyric lines above the staff. If a line of lyrics is missing across the width of a whole system, no additional gap is left between the remaining lines of lyrics. EXAMPLE You have three lines of lyrics, but one system does not have a second line of lyrics.
Lyrics Lyric hyphens and lyric extender lines PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lyrics whose alignment you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Lyric text alignment in the Lyrics group. 3. Select one of the following alignment options from the menu: ● Left ● Center ● Right RESULT The alignment of the selected lyrics is changed.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers The start of a choral piece with three lyric lines for its three verses In Dorico Elements, you can have multiple lines of lyrics both above and below the same staff. Turning lyric lines into chorus lyric lines or lyric line translations changes both their placement and appearance as chorus lyrics generally use an italic font.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RESULT The line number or type of the whole lyric line of the selected lyric is changed. NOTE The position of the selected lyric line relative to other lyric lines at the same position might be changed. For example, if there were two lyric lines and you changed Line 1 to Line 3, it now appears below Line 2.
Lyrics Lyric line numbers 2. Select the staff-relative placement you want in one of the following ways: ● Choose Edit > Lyrics > Placement > Above. ● Choose Edit > Lyrics > Placement > Below. TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RESULT The staff-relative placement of the whole lyric lines in which you selected lyrics is changed.
Lyrics Verse numbers Verse numbers Verse numbers indicate the order in which lyrics are sung when multiple lines of lyrics share the same musical passage. They are commonly used in hymns and song sheets. Depending on the type of music you are writing, verse numbers might not be appropriate. Therefore, hiding/showing verse numbers in Dorico Elements is optional. By default, verse numbers are not shown. You can hide/show verse numbers on individually selected lyrics.
Lyrics East Asian elision slurs 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Show East Asian elision slur in the Lyrics group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT East Asian elision slurs are shown on the selected lyrics when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Notes Notes are shapes that are positioned on staves to indicate musical pitches. Notes are most commonly shown with oval-shaped, round noteheads that are either filled or void depending on their duration, but there are many different designs of noteheads that you can use. Depending on their duration, notes can have stems that help indicate their duration.
Notes Notehead sets NOTE ● A single notehead can appear in multiple notehead sets. If you edit a notehead within one notehead set, your changes affect the appearance of that notehead in all notehead sets that contain it. ● Notehead sets can only contain noteheads of the same type. For example, you cannot use a normal notehead in a pitched notehead set. ● You cannot change the type of an existing notehead set or an existing notehead.
Notes Notehead sets Notehead set design Notehead set name Slashed Noteheads (Top Left to Bottom Right) Cross noteheads Notehead set name Notehead set design Circle X Noteheads Large X and Diamond Noteheads Ornate X Noteheads Plus Noteheads With X Noteheads X Noteheads X and Circle X Noteheads X and Diamond Noteheads 720 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Notes Notehead sets Triangular noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Large Arrow Down Noteheads Large Arrow Up Noteheads Triangle Down Noteheads Triangle Left Noteheads Triangle Right Noteheads Triangle Up Noteheads Diamond noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Diamond Noteheads Old-Style Diamond Noteheads White Diamond Noteheads Wide Diamond Noteheads 721 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Notes Notehead sets Slash noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Muted Slash Noteheads Oversized Slash Noteheads Slash Noteheads Small Slash Noteheads Round and square noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Moon Noteheads Rectangular Noteheads Round White with Dot Noteheads RELATED LINKS Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 723 Pitch-dependent notehead set designs Pitch-dependent notehead sets use different notehead designs or different notehead colors de
Notes Notehead sets Scale degree noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Aikin 7-shape Noteheads Funk 7-shape Noteheads Walker 4-shape Noteheads Walker 7-shape Noteheads Pitched noteheads Notehead set design Notehead set name Figurenotes© Noteheads Pitch Name Noteheads RELATED LINKS Notehead sets on page 718 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 723 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads You can change the notehead design of individual noteheads, includi
Notes Changing the size of notes PROCEDURE 1. Select the noteheads whose design you want to change. 2. Choose Edit > Notehead > [Notehead type] > [Notehead design]. You can also choose these options from the context menu. For example, to change the notehead design of the selected notes to X noteheads, choose Edit > Notehead > Crosses > X Noteheads. RESULT The notehead design of the selected notes is changed.
Notes Moving notes rhythmically 4. ● Grace ● Cue ● Cue grace Optional: If you activated Custom scale, change the value in the value field. RESULT The size of the selected notes is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. ● If you activated Scale, the selected notes are changed to the selected default scale size.
Notes Specifying the string for individual notes NOTE If Chords is not activated and any of your selected notes collide with other notes in the same staff and at the same rhythmic position that are in the same voice as your selected notes, the existing notes are deleted and replaced with your selected notes. You can undo moving notes immediately, which restores any notes deleted in the process.
Notes Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range NOTE If you subsequently change the pitches of notes, String is automatically deactivated for all notes that can no longer be played on their specified string.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Calculating harp pedal diagrams based on existing music on page 301 Annotations on page 537 Bracketed noteheads Bracketed noteheads are often used to indicate that notes are optional, editorial, not played in all playthroughs in music with repeats, or pressed down but not fully struck on the piano. In Dorico Elements, you can show brackets on any notehead. Notehead brackets extend slightly above and below noteheads so it is clear which notes are included in each bracket.
Notes Bracketed noteheads Square brackets on single noteheads on a notation staff Square bracket on a chord on a notation staff Square brackets on single noteheads on tablature Square bracket on a chord on tablature RELATED LINKS Showing brackets around one/all noteheads in tie chains on page 730 Showing notes as dead notes on page 782 Inputting notes on page 161 Ties on page 938 Guitar bends on page 768 Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives on page 771 Vibrato bar dives and returns on page 773 Showing brack
Notes Bracketed noteheads If you selected all notes in chords, Dorico Elements shows a single bracket for each chord unless they contain very large gaps, in which case Dorico Elements automatically splits brackets. If you selected individual notes within chords, they are each shown with separate brackets. By default, bracketed notes have reduced velocity, causing them to sound quieter in playback than normal notes. TIP ● Deactivating Bracket style hides brackets on the selected notes.
Notes Bracketed noteheads 2. In the Properties panel, activate/deactivate Bracket until end of tie chain in the Bracketed Noteheads group. RESULT Brackets appear at the start and end of the selected tie chains when Bracket until end of tie chain is activated, and only around the first note/chord when it is deactivated.
Notes Bracketed noteheads 2. In the Properties panel, activate Break bracket in the Bracketed Noteheads group. RESULT Brackets are split immediately below the selected notes. EXAMPLE Chord with single round bracket Chord with split round bracket RELATED LINKS Inputting chords on page 192 732 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Harmonics Harmonics are pitches produced by touching resonating strings at specific positions along their length, allowing the corresponding harmonic partial to sound. Harmonics often have a high pitch with a glassy, purer sound than stopped pitches. There are two different types of harmonics: natural and artificial. Harmonic partials are numbered according to their order in the harmonic series, which also correlates to the node on the string which produces them.
Harmonics Turning notes into harmonics Turning notes into harmonics You can turn existing notes into artificial and natural harmonics. Harmonics can represent the sounding, touched, or stopped pitch. PREREQUISITE You have input the notes you want to turn into harmonics. However, the pitch you should input depends on the style/appearance you want to use. ● For natural harmonics, we recommend that you input the desired sounding pitch.
Harmonics Changing the harmonic partial AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the partial for harmonics. You can also change the appearance of natural harmonics and the type of artificial harmonics. If you want to turn harmonics back into normal notes, deactivate Type in the Harmonics group.
Harmonics Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals RELATED LINKS Tablature on page 917 Specifying the string for individual notes on page 726 Hiding/Showing or parenthesizing harmonic accidentals You can hide/show individual harmonic accidentals, or show them in round or square brackets, independently of hiding/showing or parenthesizing accidentals of stopped pitch notes. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Both artificial and natural harmonics can be notated in different ways. In Dorico Elements, it is possible to indicate the desired sounding pitch, either the stopped or touched pitch, or both stopped and touched pitches for individual harmonics.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Artificial harmonics Normal Shows two noteheads: one indicating the stopped pitch, the other the touched pitch. The touched pitch is automatically calculated based on the partial; the default partial is the second partial. On tablature, the stopped fret is shown on the left and the touched fret is shown on the right in parentheses. This is the default appearance of artificial harmonics on all staves.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Single notehead (stopped) artificial harmonic on notation staff Single notehead (stopped) artificial harmonic on tablature RELATED LINKS Tablature on page 917 Changing the appearance of natural harmonics By default, natural harmonics appear as normal noteheads with a circle shown above, which indicates the desired sounding pitch.
Harmonics Appearances/Styles of harmonics Specifying the string for individual notes on page 726 Changing the style of artificial harmonics By default, artificial harmonics appear as two noteheads: one normal, which indicates the stopped pitch, and one diamond, which indicates the touched pitch. You can change the style of artificial harmonics individually, for example, to indicate pinch harmonics. NOTE These steps only apply to harmonics with the Artificial type. PROCEDURE 1.
Ornaments Ornaments are markings that indicate multiple notes are played in addition to the notated pitch. They are used to decorate music, such as in Baroque music, which is highly decorated with trills and other ornaments. Over time, specific ways of notating how performers should play notes have developed and different ornament symbols indicate different patterns of decorative notes. Nonetheless, ornaments give some freedom to performers to embellish music in their own way.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments PROCEDURE 1. Select the ornaments whose interval you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Ornaments group, as appropriate for the selected ornaments: 3. ● Interval above ● Interval below Change the values in the value fields to the intervals you want. ● 0 or 4 and above shows no accidental. ● 1 shows a flat. ● 2 shows a natural. ● 3 shows a sharp.
Ornaments Positions of ornaments You can move ornaments to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions. Moving ornaments rhythmically You can move ornaments to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the ornaments you want to move. NOTE When using the mouse, you can only move one ornament at a time. 2.
Ornaments Trills PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose start position you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Start position in the Trills group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Notehead ● Accidental RESULT The start position of the selected trills is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Ornaments Trills RELATED LINKS Input methods for ornaments, arpeggio signs, glissando lines, and jazz articulations on page 266 Trill intervals on page 748 Trills in playback on page 754 Tablature on page 917 Hiding/Showing trill marks You can hide/show trill marks at the start of individual trills. This also hides/shows trill marks on all systems on which the trills extend. PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose trill marks you want to hide/show. 2.
Ornaments Trills EXAMPLE A trill extension line starting slow and ending fast AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can customize the playback speed of trills individually. RELATED LINKS Changing the playback speeds of trills on page 755 Hiding/Showing speed changes in trill extension lines You can hide/show speed changes in the extension lines for individual trills, for example, if you want to hear different speeds in playback but show extension lines with consistent wiggles. PROCEDURE 1.
Ornaments Trills RESULT Trill extension lines are shown when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. When the property is deactivated, trill extension lines are only shown on tied notes by default.
Ornaments Trill intervals Trill intervals Trill intervals tell performers which notes to play and also affect the pitches used in playback in Dorico Elements. For example, a trill with a sharp accidental on an E indicates that the performer trills between E and F♯, rather than between E and F. The different accidentals on these trills indicate changes in the trilled-to note.
Ornaments Trill intervals Changing vibrato bar dip intervals on page 782 Hiding/Showing trill interval accidentals You can hide/show accidentals for individual trill intervals, for example, if you want to show the accidental for the first note of a trill but hide the accidentals for subsequent notes. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Ornaments Trill intervals intervals of trills and existing trill intervals within their duration individually after they have been input. PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills, trill intervals, or trill interval signposts whose interval you want to change. NOTE For trills that span multiple notes and have multiple interval changes, you must select each trill interval you want to change individually. If you select the trill mark/extension line, only the first trill interval is changed. 2.
Ornaments Trill intervals NOTE You can only change trill intervals at noteheads. 4. Press Shift-O to open the ornaments popover. 5. Enter the trill interval you want into the popover. For example, enter m3 for a minor third. 6. Press Return to close the popover. 7. Optional: Repeat steps 3 to 6 to change the trill interval at other noteheads in the trill. 8. Press Esc or Return to stop note input. RESULT The trill interval is changed at the corresponding noteheads.
Ornaments Trill intervals RESULT The interval of the selected trill intervals is reset. This applies from the selected trill intervals until the next interval change in the trill or the end of the trill, whichever comes first. For example, if you selected a trill with no interval changes within its duration, the interval is reset for the whole trill. By default, trill intervals appear as accidentals when the interval is a second and as auxiliary notes for all other intervals.
Ornaments Trill intervals NOTE On tablature, the trilled-to pitch always appears as a parenthesized fret number. Changing the appearance of trill intervals You can change the appearance of trills with a second interval on notation staves individually, for example, if you want to show auxiliary notes on some trills to clarify a change in the trilled-to pitch. NOTE You can only change the trill interval appearance of trills with a major/minor second interval. PROCEDURE 1.
Ornaments Trills in playback 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Above ● Below ● On the right ● Superscript RESULT The position of interval indicators relative to the selected trill marks is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. Trills in playback Dorico Elements plays back trills by using a combination of sampled trills, when available, and triggering multiple notes.
Ornaments Trills in playback In contemporary performance practice, trills are usually performed starting on the written note, while in the historical performance practice of the Baroque and Classical eras, trills are usually performed starting on the upper (trilled-to) note. You can change the default starting pitch for trills individually.
Ornaments Trills in playback Changing the starting pitch of trills By default in Dorico Elements, trills start on the lower note, which is usually the written note. However, the accepted practice in Baroque and Classical music is to start trills on the upper note. You can change the starting pitch of trills individually. PROCEDURE 1. Select the trills whose starting note you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Start on upper note in the Trills group. 3.
Arpeggio signs Arpeggio signs are vertical lines that indicate chords are to be played arpeggiated, or “spread”, so that the notes in the chord are played very quickly one after another. Arpeggio signs are normally shown as vertical wavy lines. Arpeggiated chords can be played in two directions: ● Upwards, starting from the bottom note in the chord. ● Downwards, starting from the top note in the chord.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs A vertical wavy line that indicates chords are to be arpeggiated from the top note downwards. Non arpeggio A bracket with straight lines that indicates all notes in the chord are to be played together, not arpeggiated. Curved arpeggio A curved line, similar to a slur but vertical, that some composers use to indicate gentle or partial arpeggiation.
Arpeggio signs Types of arpeggio signs TIP You can also change the arpeggio type by opening the ornaments popover and changing the entry. RELATED LINKS Ornaments popover on page 266 Changing existing items on page 342 Changing the end appearance of arpeggio signs Down arpeggio signs have an arrowhead at the bottom of the line by default, but up arpeggio signs have no arrowhead by default. You can change the appearance of the ends of arpeggio signs individually.
Arpeggio signs Length of arpeggio signs Length of arpeggio signs The length of arpeggio signs is determined by the pitch range of notes in the voices/staves to which the arpeggio sign applies. Dorico Elements automatically adjusts the length of arpeggio signs if the pitches of the notes in the voices/staves to which the sign applies change, or you add notes to, or delete notes from, the chords.
Arpeggio signs Changing arpeggio playback relative to the beat If no notes exist at the next rhythmic position according to the rhythmic grid, the arpeggio sign is not shown. If you continue moving it to the right/left, it is shown again beside the next note at a rhythmic position that can be reached according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. You can change the rhythmic grid resolution if you want to move arpeggio signs to notes at other rhythmic positions.
Arpeggio signs Changing the playback duration of arpeggios ● End on beat RESULT The beat-relative position of the selected arpeggios in playback is changed. EXAMPLE Arpeggio starting on the beat Arpeggio ending on the beat Changing the playback duration of arpeggios You can change the duration of individual arpeggios in playback. The duration of arpeggios is expressed as a fraction of the notated rhythm of chords.
Glissando lines Glissando lines indicate a continuous transition between two notes, which can be smooth or in chromatic steps. They can have straight lines or wiggly lines, and can be shown with a text indication or as a line without text. There are different conventions regarding the playing techniques for glissando and portamento.
Glissando lines Glissando lines across empty bars Glissando lines across empty bars In Dorico Elements, you can input glissando lines between any two notes, even if there are rests or other notes between them, and including between notes in different voices and notes on different staves.
Glissando lines Changing glissando line text Changing glissando line text You can show individual glissando lines with “gliss.” text, “port.” text, or without text. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the glissando lines whose text you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Glissando text in the Glissando Lines group. 3.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in playback RESULT If Show if sufficient space is chosen, glissando line text is not shown if the glissando line is too short. If Always show is chosen, glissando line text is always shown, even if the glissando line is short. However, this can cause the glissando line text to collide with other items, such as noteheads and stems. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Glissando lines Glissando lines in playback RESULT If you activated Delayed start only, the playback of the selected glissando lines is starts halfway through their duration. If you also activated Delay, playback of the selected glissando lines follows your set value. 767 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Guitar bends The guitar bend is a technique commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer pushes strings out of their normal alignment after notes start to sound. Bending strings tightens them, which produces the characteristic pitch fluctuation. Performing a guitar bend often also involves sustaining the bent pitch before allowing the string to return to its natural position and un-bent pitch. In Dorico Elements, these actions are called a “guitar bend hold” and “release” respectively.
Guitar bends Guitar bends on chord on notation staff Guitar bends on chord on tablature Sequences of consecutive guitar bends are notated as bend runs on tablature. Guitar bend runs on tablature Guitar bend holds Guitar bend holds indicate that the performer should maintain the pitch at the peak of a guitar bend. They are usually shown on tied notes. On tablature, guitar bend holds are notated using a horizontal line. They are not notated on notation staves.
Guitar bends Release on notation staff Release on tablature If you input releases on multiple notes in chords, they are notated with a single downwards-pointing curved line on tablature. If the bend intervals are the same for all notes, the end pitches are parenthesized together.
Guitar bends Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives Guitar pre-bends and pre-dives are techniques commonly performed on electric guitars, where the performer changes the initial sounding pitch of strings before playing notes, either by bending strings to tighten them or using the vibrato bar to loosen them.
Guitar bends Guitar post-bends Guitar pre-dive on notation staff Guitar pre-dive on tablature NOTE Stems, stem flags, and beaming always appear stem-up on tablature in single-voice contexts, which means they can collide with guitar bends.
Guitar bends Vibrato bar dives and returns If you input guitar post-bends on multiple notes in chords, their arrowheads are automatically aligned. On notation staves, the appropriate number of curved lines is shown according to the staff positions of notes in chords. Guitar post-bends on chord on notation staff Guitar post-bends on chord on tablature NOTE Guitar post-bends are not currently reflected in playback. This is planned for future versions.
Guitar bends Bend intervals Consecutive vibrato bar bends on notation staff Consecutive vibrato bar bends on tablature If you input vibrato bar dives and returns on multiple notes in chords, a single V appears on tablature as long as the bend intervals are the same for all notes.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing guitar bend hold lines EXAMPLE Guitar bend with whole step Guitar pre-bend with interval, displayed as full minor third interval, displayed as 1 1/2 Vibrato bar dive and return with whole step interval, displayed as -1 Guitar post-bend with microtonal interval, displayed as 1/4 Bend intervals for guitar bends, pre-bends, pre-dives, and post-dives are positioned above the arrowhead/line for the corresponding notation.
Guitar bends Changing the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives EXAMPLE Hold line hidden Hold line shown Changing the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives You can change the direction of guitar pre-bends/pre-dives individually. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, guitar pre-bends/pre-dives are positioned on the notehead-side of notes in single-voice contexts.
Guitar bends Hiding/Showing accidentals on guitar pre-bends/pre-dives Hiding/Showing accidentals on guitar pre-bends/pre-dives You can hide/show accidentals on guitar pre-bends/pre-dives individually, for example, to save horizontal space in a layout that also shows the interval clearly on tablature. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Guitar techniques The term “guitar techniques” covers a range of techniques typically associated with guitar music, such as hammer-ons, pull-offs, and pitch alterations that use the vibrato bar on electric guitars.
Guitar techniques Tapping In Dorico Elements, vibrato bar dips are considered ornaments. You can select and delete them independently of the notes to which they apply. Vibrato bar dips appear on both notation staves and tablature and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual vibrato bar dips. Vibrato bar indications/lines Vibrato bar indications are text instructions that indicate that the performer should use the vibrato bar.
Guitar techniques Hammer-ons and pull-offs A phrase containing right-hand and left-hand tapping By default, tapping indications only appear on notation staves and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual tapping indications. In Dorico Elements, tapping indications are considered properties of notes.
Guitar techniques Hammer-ons and pull-offs A phrase containing hammer-ons, a pull-off, and a ligado By default, hammer-ons/pull-offs appear on both notation staves and tablature and are placed above the staff. You can change the staff-relative placement of individual hammer-on/pull-off indications. In Dorico Elements, hammer-on/pull-off indications are considered properties of notes.
Guitar techniques Showing notes as dead notes RELATED LINKS Inputting hammer-ons/pull-offs on page 288 Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques on page 783 Fingerings for fretted instruments on page 665 Showing notes as dead notes You can show individual notes belonging to fretted instruments as dead notes. Dead notes are notated with cross noteheads on notation staves and with an X on tablature. PROCEDURE 1.
Guitar techniques Changing the staff-relative placement of guitar techniques RESULT The interval of the selected vibrato bar dips is changed.
Guitar techniques Lengthening/Shortening vibrato bar indications/lines Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Lengthening/Shortening vibrato bar indications/lines You can lengthen/shorten the duration of vibrato bar indications/lines after they have been input. Lengthening a vibrato bar indication gives it duration and shows a duration line, which is dashed by default. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the vibrato bar indications/lines you want to lengthen/shorten.
Guitar techniques Deleting guitar techniques EXAMPLE Vibrato bar indication (selected) with no duration Vibrato bar indication (selected) with duration and duration line RELATED LINKS Vibrato bar techniques on page 778 Playing technique duration on page 819 Playing technique continuation lines on page 818 Input methods for guitar bends and guitar techniques on page 278 Deleting guitar techniques You can remove vibrato bar scoops and tapping, hammer-on, and pull-off indications from notes after you have
Jazz articulations Jazz articulations in Dorico Elements cover a range of note ornamentations that are idiomatic to jazz music, and brass instruments in particular. Although they are often known as jazz “articulations”, these techniques function more like ornaments than articulations because they change the pitch rather than the duration or attack of notes. For this reason, they are considered ornaments in Dorico Elements.
Jazz articulations Jazz ornaments Fall (bend) Fall (smooth) Additionally, there are other jazz ornaments commonly used by brass instruments that you can add to notes in the same ways as inputting jazz articulations. If your sound library includes samples for jazz articulations, Dorico Elements loads the required samples using playback techniques.
Jazz articulations Positions of jazz articulations Positions of jazz articulations In Dorico Elements, jazz articulations are automatically positioned relative to the noteheads to which they apply, with any other notations on those notes, such as rhythm dots, accidentals, and back notes, automatically considered.
Jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations NOTE You must select notes with smooth jazz articulations on the same side, for example, only select notes with smooth jazz articulations before them. 2.
Jazz articulations Deleting jazz articulations Inputting vibrato bar dives on page 281 790 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Page numbers Page numbers are used to give each page a unique number, and indicate its position relative to other pages. Just as in newspapers and books, musical scores and parts use page numbers to make sure the music stays in the correct order. Because you can have multiple flows in a single project in Dorico Elements, you do not need to change page numbers manually in most cases.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers 3. Click Page Setup in the category list. 4. In the Page Numbers section, select one of the following options from the Use menu: 5. ● Number ● Roman numeral Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The page number numeral style is changed in the selected layouts. Hiding/Showing page numbers You can hide/show page numbers in each layout independently, including specifying whether to hide/show a page number on the first page.
Page numbers Hiding/Showing page numbers NOTE Your per-layout setting for whether page numbers are hidden/shown above flow headings affects whether page numbers are shown on pages where they are higher on the page than flow headings. RELATED LINKS Flow headings on page 364 Hiding/Showing information in running headers above flow headings on page 380 793 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Harp pedaling Harp pedaling is a broad term that covers the specific requirements for notating music for harps. This primarily involves harp pedal diagrams, which are often necessary due to the way in which modern concert harps change their tuning.
Harp pedaling Changing the appearance of harp pedal diagrams Note Names Indicates the required accidentals for the seven diatonic pitches, arranged in two lines. Right-foot pedals are shown on top and left-foot pedals are shown below. Any pitches that you input that do not fit with the current harp pedal diagram are considered out of range, and appear red when colors are shown for notes that are out of range.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing harp pedaling in layouts RESULT The appearance of the selected harp pedal diagrams is changed in the current layout. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. TIP You can change the default appearance of harp pedaling in each layout independently in the Harp Pedaling section of the Players page in Setup > Layout Options.
Harp pedaling Hiding/Showing borders on harp pedal diagrams ● You can hide/show harp pedaling signposts by choosing View > Signposts > Harp Pedals. Harp pedaling signposts are shown when a tick appears beside Harp Pedals in the menu, and hidden when no tick appears. Hiding/Showing harp pedal diagrams individually You can hide/show individual harp pedal diagrams in layouts in which harp pedaling is shown. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Harp pedaling Positions of harp pedal diagrams 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Borders are shown on the selected note name harp pedal diagrams when the checkbox is activated, and hidden when the checkbox is deactivated. EXAMPLE Note name harp pedal diagram with border hidden Note name harp pedal diagram with border shown Positions of harp pedal diagrams By default, harp pedal diagrams are centered vertically between the two staves usually shown for harps.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling NOTE If moving harp pedal diagrams means some notes no longer fit with the current harp pedal diagram and colors are shown for notes out of range, these notes appear red. RELATED LINKS Hiding/Showing colors for notes out of range on page 727 Partial harp pedaling Partial harp pedal diagrams only show the notes whose pedal setting must change at that position, rather than showing the required settings for all pedals.
Harp pedaling Partial harp pedaling PROCEDURE 1. Select the note name harp pedal diagrams for which you want to allow/disallow partial harp pedaling. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Partial pedaling in the Harp Pedals group. 3. Activate/Deactivate the corresponding checkbox. RESULT Partial harp pedaling is allowed for the selected note name harp pedal diagrams when the checkbox is activated, and disallowed when the checkbox is deactivated.
Pedal lines Pedal lines indicate to performers which piano pedals to use, and can also give performance instructions, such as how far down to depress the pedals and when to lift the pedal to clear the resonance. Most pianos have either two or three pedals. These pedals are: Sustain pedal The sustain pedal controls the dampers on the piano strings, which is why it is also known as the “damper pedal”. It is also the most commonly used pedal.
Pedal lines Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 291 Pedal lines in playback on page 812 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines on page 808 Text pedal line signs on page 810 Lines on page 823 Playing technique continuation lines on page 818 Sustain pedal retakes and pedal level changes Pedal retakes indicate where a player should lift the sustain pedal, which dampens t
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines Removing retakes and pedal level changes You can remove pedal retakes and level changes without deleting the sustain pedal line or changing its rhythmic position. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the note on the staff and at the rhythmic position of the retake or pedal level change you want to remove. NOTE You can only remove one retake or pedal level change at a time. 2.
Pedal lines Positions of pedal lines NOTE You cannot move retakes rhythmically. You must remove them and input a new retake at the position you want.
Pedal lines Lengthening/Shortening pedal lines NOTE Pedal lines can only be moved along staves. If you want to move a pedal line across staves, you must delete the pedal line and input a new pedal line on the other staff.
Pedal lines Lengthening/Shortening pedal lines ● To snap the end of a single pedal line to the next notehead, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Alt/ Opt-Right Arrow . ● To snap the end of a single pedal line to the previous notehead, press Ctrl/Cmd-ShiftAlt/Opt-Left Arrow . ● To lengthen them by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptRight Arrow . ● To shorten them by the current rhythmic grid resolution, press Shift-Alt/OptLeft Arrow .
Pedal lines Lengthening/Shortening pedal lines RELATED LINKS Moving pedal lines rhythmically on page 804 Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines on page 808 Text pedal line signs on page 810 Merging pedal lines You can merge existing sustain pedal lines together, for example, if you want to fill in a gap between two sustain pedal lines. NOTE These steps only apply to sustain pedal lines. PROCEDURE 1. Select the sustain pedal lines on the same staff that you want to merge together.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines Pedal lines normally comprise a start sign, a continuation line, and an end hook. This indicates clearly to performers where to depress each type of pedal, how long to keep it depressed, and where to lift it.
Pedal lines Pedal line start signs, hooks, and continuation lines 2. 3. In the Properties panel, activate the following properties, individually or together, in the Pedal Lines group: ● Line start hook ● Line end hook Select one of the following options from each menu: ● No Hook ● Vertical Hook ● Slant Hook ● Inverse Hook RESULT The hook type at the start/end of the selected pedal lines is changed.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs RESULT Continuation signs are shown with parentheses when the checkbox is activated, and without parentheses when the checkbox is deactivated. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Pedal lines Text pedal line signs NOTE Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered. RELATED LINKS Changing the start sign appearance of pedal lines on page 808 Editing pedal line continuation text You can change the text shown at the start of subsequent systems when pedal lines continue across system/frame breaks. NOTE These steps only apply to pedal lines that use text as their start sign. PROCEDURE 1. Select the pedal lines whose continuation text you want to edit. 2.
Pedal lines Pedal lines in playback RESULT The restorative text shown at the ends of the selected una corda pedal lines is changed. Deactivating Restorative text restores the default restorative text for the selected pedal lines. NOTE Deactivating properties permanently deletes any custom text entered. Pedal lines in playback Pedal lines are automatically played back in Dorico Elements. The three piano pedals send MIDI controllers as follows: ● Sustain pedal lines send MIDI controller 64 (Sustain).
Playing techniques The term “playing techniques” covers a wide range of instructions intended to tell performers to modify the sound of the notes they are playing, for example, by changing their embouchure or changing the position of their bow, or by modifying their instrument, such as adding a mute or depressing a pedal. In Dorico Elements, there are the following types of playing techniques: Glyph playing techniques Playing techniques that display symbols, such as up bow or down bow markings.
Playing techniques Adding text to playing techniques RELATED LINKS Input methods for playing techniques, pedal lines, string indicators, and harp pedal diagrams on page 291 Playback techniques on page 512 Pedal lines on page 801 String indicators on page 674 Playing technique continuation lines on page 818 Groups of playing techniques on page 821 Adding text to playing techniques You can add text to playing techniques after they have been input, for example, to clarify the intention of the playing techniqu
Playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques Hiding/Showing playing techniques You can hide/show playing techniques individually, for example, if your expression map requires you to input a playing technique to trigger the correct playback but you do not want that technique to appear in the music. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1.
Playing techniques Positions of playing techniques techniques for the up-stem voices are placed above the staff and playing techniques for the down-stem voices are automatically placed below the staff. Placement of playing techniques with two voices on the same staff You can move playing techniques to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions.
Playing techniques Lengthening/Shortening playing techniques NOTE If a single playing technique passes over another playing technique as part of its move, the existing one is unaffected as multiple playing techniques can exist at the same rhythmic position. However, if you move multiple playing techniques together, any existing playing techniques they pass over are shortened or deleted accordingly.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines by moving them rhythmically, or by clicking and dragging the start handle once they have duration. ● Click and drag the circular handle at the start/end to the right/left. NOTE Playing technique groups only have a single handle at their start and end, not individual handles for each playing technique within the group.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Indicates that the playing technique at the start must gradually turn into the playing technique at the end over the duration specified by the line. The transition line for most playing techniques is a solid line with an arrow cap at the end. Transition lines are automatically shown between playing techniques in groups. NOTE Playing technique continuation lines do not affect playback.
Playing techniques Playing technique continuation lines Hiding/Showing playing technique duration lines You can hide/show duration lines for individual playing techniques. When hiding duration lines, you can show nothing or sim.. When showing duration lines, you can show a line or repeat the signs of glyph playing techniques. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. NOTE These steps only apply to playing technique duration lines.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques Groups of playing techniques Groups of playing techniques are automatically aligned in a row and can be moved and edited as a group. When you move individual playing techniques within a group, the lengths of any continuation lines on either side automatically adjust to compensate.
Playing techniques Groups of playing techniques If you want to group a playing technique group to another playing technique group, you must first ungroup them. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the playing techniques you want to group together. 2. Choose Edit > Playing Techniques > Group Playing Techniques. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The selected playing techniques are grouped together.
Lines Lines can convey a variety of meanings in music, such as indicating which hand to use in piano music or a gradual change in bow pressure. In Dorico Elements, lines can be vertical, horizontal, or angled between notes and have different styles and appearances.
Lines A phrase containing two notehead-attached lines, showing where the melody moves between piano staves ● Barline-attached Attached to a rhythmic position and aligned with barlines, if their rhythmic positions coincide with barline positions. Barline-attached lines are always horizontal. A barline-attached line spanning two full bars ● Rhythmic position-attached Attached to a rhythmic position and positioned relative to notes, chords, or rests at those rhythmic positions.
Lines Line components Lines panel on page 305 Adding text to lines on page 835 Changing the placement of horizontal lines on page 828 Arpeggio signs on page 757 Glissando lines on page 763 Octave lines on page 622 Trills on page 744 Playing technique continuation lines on page 818 Pedal lines on page 801 Repeat endings on page 853 Guitar bends on page 768 Tuplet brackets on page 973 Line components In Dorico Elements, lines consist of multiple components that together function as a single item.
Lines Positions of lines NOTE Dorico Pro provides further options for customizing lines and line components, such as using text for caps and music symbols for annotations in the center of lines. You might encounter lines with different components than are available in Dorico Elements if you import or open a project that contains them.
Lines Positions of lines Showing vertical lines on the right/left of notes You can change the side of notes on which vertical lines appear, for example, to show selected vertical lines on the right side of notes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the vertical lines whose horizontal position you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Side in the Vertical Lines group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Left ● Right RESULT The selected lines appear on the corresponding side of notes.
Lines Positions of lines Showing vertical lines before grace notes You can position individual vertical lines so they appear to the left of grace notes. By default, vertical lines are positioned after grace notes, that is, between grace notes and normal notes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the vertical lines you want to show before grace notes. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line before grace notes in the Vertical Lines group. RESULT The selected vertical lines are positioned before grace notes.
Lines Positions of lines TIP You can also cycle through the different placement options for selected horizontal lines by pressing F . AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can change the staff position of lines shown inside the staff. ● You can erase the background of text on lines shown inside the staff.
Lines Positions of lines Moving horizontal lines rhythmically You can move barline-/rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines to new rhythmic positions after they have been input. NOTE ● You cannot move notehead-attached starts/ends of horizontal lines rhythmically, except by moving the notes to which they are attached. ● Although you can use these key commands for vertical lines, you cannot move vertical lines over rests, you can only move them to adjacent notes/chords in the same voice.
Lines Length of lines You can undo this action, but any lines shortened/deleted in the process are only restored if you moved lines using the keyboard. Length of lines Dorico Elements automatically calculates the appropriate length for both horizontal and vertical lines. ● The length of horizontal lines is determined by the rhythmic duration of the line. Horizontal lines with different attachment types are positioned differently, which can affect their graphical length.
Lines Length of lines ● ● When using the keyboard, lengthening/shortening lines only moves their end. You can move the start of lines by moving lines rhythmically, or by clicking and dragging the start handle of a single line. Click and drag the circular handle at the start/end to the right/left. RESULT Single lines are lengthened/shortened according to the current rhythmic grid resolution or to the next/previous notehead, whichever is closer.
Lines Changing the body style of lines NOTE These steps only apply to rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines. PROCEDURE 1. Select the rhythmic position-attached horizontal lines whose start and/or end position you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Horizontal start position in the Horizontal Lines group. 3. Select one of the following options from the menu: ● Notehead ● Notehead center ● Accidental 4. Activate Horizontal end position in the Horizontal Lines group. 5.
Lines Changing the caps of lines NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line body style in either the Horizontal Lines or Vertical Lines group. 3. Select the style you want from the menu. RESULT The body style of the selected lines is changed. NOTE This does not affect the caps of the selected lines.
Lines Changing the direction of lines Changing the direction of lines You can change the direction of both horizontal and vertical lines, for example, to make a horizontal line with an arrow end cap point to the left, or to make a vertical line with text appear upside-down with its text reading downwards. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines whose direction you want to change. NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2.
Lines Adding text to lines RESULT The text you entered into the value field is shown centered in the middle of the selected lines. On vertical lines, it reads upwards. EXAMPLE Text on a horizontal line Text on a vertical line AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● If you want text on vertical lines to read downwards, you can reverse the lines. ● You can erase the backgrounds of text on lines.
Lines Adding text to lines EXAMPLE Text Above Text Centered Text Below RELATED LINKS Changing the placement of text relative to lines on page 838 Changing the position of text relative to vertical lines You can change the position of text relative to vertical lines individually, for example, to show text on the left of vertical lines. By default, text is centered on vertical lines. PROCEDURE 1. Select the vertical lines whose text position you want to change. 2.
Lines Adding text to lines Changing the placement of text relative to lines You can change the placement of text relative to lines individually, for example, to show text at the start of horizontal lines or the top of vertical lines. By default, text appears in the center of lines. PROCEDURE 1. Select the lines whose text placement you want to change. NOTE You must select either only horizontal lines or only vertical lines. 2.
Rehearsal marks Rehearsal marks are an ordered sequence of letters or numbers, which along with bar numbers, provide a reference point for music that has multiple players, and make the chronological sequence of the music clear. They tell performers where they are in the piece, and allow performers to orient and co-ordinate themselves easily in rehearsals and concerts. Rehearsal marks can also be used to indicate significant changes in the music, and you can freely decide their positions.
Rehearsal marks Positions of rehearsal marks When rehearsal marks coincide with tempo changes, Dorico Elements automatically positions tempo marks to the right of rehearsal marks. Dorico Elements automatically adjusts staff spacing to ensure rehearsal marks are correctly positioned. You can move rehearsal marks to different rhythmic positions in Write mode. They are automatically positioned to avoid collisions.
Rehearsal marks Deleting rehearsal marks NOTE Only one rehearsal mark can exist at each rhythmic position. If a rehearsal mark passes over another rehearsal mark as part of its move, the existing rehearsal mark is deleted and replaced by the rehearsal mark being moved. You can undo this action, but any rehearsal marks deleted in the process are only restored if you moved the rehearsal mark using the keyboard. Deleting rehearsal marks You can delete rehearsal marks.
Rehearsal marks Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type TIP You can also change the sequence type of rehearsal marks, for example, if you want rehearsal mark C to appear as rehearsal mark 3. Changing the rehearsal mark sequence type Rehearsal marks can be letters, numbers, or bar numbers. You can change the sequence type of individual rehearsal marks, and create secondary rehearsal mark sequences. In Dorico Elements, you can use all three available rehearsal mark sequences simultaneously.
Rehearsal marks Adding prefixes/suffixes to rehearsal marks 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text you entered into the value field is added to the selected rehearsal marks as a prefix or a suffix. 843 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Markers Markers are labels locked to a particular position in time, most commonly in relation to a video. They typically indicate an important moment that requires musical prominence, and composers often use them to help shape the writing process. Markers on a timecode staff showing custom text and timecodes By default, markers in Dorico Elements show the default text “Marker” and also include the timecode of their fixed position in time. In Dorico Elements, you can use markers in any project.
Markers Changing the vertical position of markers By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Markers and Timecode in the category list. 4. Activate/Deactivate Show markers. 5. Click Apply, then Close. RESULT Markers are hidden/shown in the selected layouts.
Markers Editing marker text ● You can change the default distance between the timecode staff and other staves on the Vertical Spacing page in Setup > Layout Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can change the frequency of timecodes on the timecode staff. RELATED LINKS Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 850 Changing the timecode frequency on page 851 Editing marker text The default text shown in new markers is “Marker”. You can change the text shown in each marker individually.
Markers Moving markers rhythmically RESULT The timecode of the marker is changed. The marker automatically moves relative to the music to reflect its new time position. RELATED LINKS Markers section of the Video panel on page 319 Moving markers rhythmically You can move markers to new rhythmic positions. However, as markers have a fixed position in time, moving markers relative to the notated music automatically changes the tempo on either side of the marker.
Markers Defining markers as important 2. In the Markers section, activate the checkbox in the Imp. column for each marker you want to define as important. RESULT Markers with activated checkboxes are defined as important. The Find Tempo button at the bottom of the Markers section becomes available. RELATED LINKS Find Tempo dialog on page 320 848 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Timecodes Timecodes indicate an exact position in time, usually in the context of a video. They allow precise synchronization between multiple elements, such as music and moving images, and can be used as a reference tool. Timecodes are displayed in the format hh:mm:ss:ff, which is two-digit hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Timecodes Changing the initial timecode value RELATED LINKS Frame rates on page 141 Video Properties dialog on page 137 Changing the timecode frequency on page 851 Changing the content shown in the transport display on page 473 Markers on page 844 Hiding/Showing markers on page 844 Changing the vertical position of markers on page 845 Changing the vertical position of timecodes on page 850 Changing the initial timecode value You can change the timecode at which each flow in your project starts, for example
Timecodes Changing the timecode frequency By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Markers and Timecode in the category list. 4. In the Timecode subsection, choose one of the following options for Show timecode: 5.
Timecodes Changing the timecode frequency By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Markers and Timecode in the category list. 4. Optional: If the selected layouts do not show timecodes on a separate staff, choose Timecode staff for Vertical position. 5.
Repeat endings For music with repeated passages, repeat endings show which bars are played at the end of each repetition, with different endings each time if required. They are also known as “volta lines”, or as “first and second endings”, but in this documentation, we refer to them as “repeat endings”. Repeat endings comprise two or more segments, where each segment contains a different possible ending.
Repeat endings Lengthening/Shortening segments in repeat endings NOTE You cannot have fewer playthroughs than the number of segments. RESULT The total number of playthroughs in the selected repeat endings is changed. Dorico Elements adds additional playthroughs to the last closed segment in the repeat ending. NOTE You cannot change how playthroughs are divided across repeat ending segments in Dorico Elements.
Repeat endings Positions of repeat endings ● Press Shift-Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to lengthen the final segment. ● Press Shift-Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to shorten the final segment. Positions of repeat endings Repeat endings are placed above the staff at the same positions as other system objects, and their hooks align with barlines. They are commonly positioned outside of other notations, but some long items, such as gradual tempo changes, can be placed above repeat endings.
Repeat endings Changing the appearance of individual final repeat ending segments Changing the appearance of individual final repeat ending segments You can change the appearance of the line ends in the final segments of individual repeat endings. PROCEDURE 1. Select the repeat endings whose final segment appearance you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate End of line in the Repeat Endings group. 3.
Repeat markers Repeat markers show that musical material is to be repeated, but unlike repeat endings, repeat markers often involve jumping to different positions and sections in the music instead of moving through the music consecutively. In Dorico Elements, repeat markers are divided into the following types: Repeat jumps Specify the position from which players or playback must jump, such as D.C. al Coda. You can qualify the conditions under which repeat jumps are used, such as “second time only”.
Repeat markers Changing the index for repeat markers Changing the index for repeat markers You can change the index of individual repeat markers, for example, if a flow requires two different codas with different symbols so players can tell them apart. By default, all repeat markers of the same type have the same appearance, even when there are multiple repeat markers in the flow. NOTE You cannot change the index of Fine or D.C. repeat markers. PROCEDURE 1.
Repeat markers Positions of repeat markers 2. In the Properties panel, activate Custom text in the Repeat Markers group. 3. Enter the text you want into the value field. 4. Press Return . RESULT The text shown in the selected repeat markers is changed. This replaces the text in the selected repeat markers without removing any symbols. Positions of repeat markers Repeat markers are placed above the staff by default, and at the same positions as other system objects.
Repeat markers Positions of repeat markers Changing the staff-relative placement of repeat markers You can show repeat markers either above, below, or both above and below the staff in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to change the staff-placement of repeat markers. By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog.
Bar repeats Bar repeats indicate that the musical material in preceding bars must be repeated exactly, but without notating that material again. Bar repeats can comprise groups of one, two, or four bars. For example, a one-bar repeat indicates that the material in one bar is repeated, meaning every bar in the region repeats the same material. A four-bar repeat indicates that the material in the previous four bars is repeated.
Bar repeats Changing the length of the repeated phrase in bar repeat regions Moving bar repeat regions on page 862 Lengthening/Shortening bar repeat regions on page 863 Hiding/Showing multi-bar rests on page 885 Types of barlines on page 558 Annotations on page 537 Changing the length of the repeated phrase in bar repeat regions You can change the number of bars that make up the repeated phrase in individual bar repeats after you have input them, for example, if you want the region to repeat the previous t
Bar repeats Lengthening/Shortening bar repeat regions NOTE You can only move one bar repeat region at a time. 2. Move the bar repeat region to other bars in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move it to the right. ● Press Alt/Opt-Left Arrow to move it to the left. ● Click and drag it to the right/left. RESULT The selected bar repeat region is moved to bars to the right/left.
Bar repeats Hiding/Showing bar repeat region highlights NOTE ● The minimum length of a bar repeat region is one bar. If you shorten regions with longer groupings, such as every four bars, the length of the region is halved until a one-bar repeat region remains. ● Only one bar repeat region can exist at each rhythmic position.
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts RELATED LINKS Changing the bar repeat count appearance on page 866 Changing the bar repeat count frequency on page 865 Repeats popover on page 322 Inputting bar repeats on page 333 Hiding/Showing bar number ranges on multi-bar rests on page 565 Changing the start count of bar repeats You can change the number from which individual bar repeats start, for example, if you want to notate the first bar in a repeated phrase at the start of each system but show a continuous count acr
Bar repeats Bar repeat counts NOTE Bar repeat counts are only shown on one-bar repeat regions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the one-bar repeats whose count frequency you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count frequency in the Bar Repeat Regions group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The count frequency is changed for the selected bar repeat regions.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping Bar repeat grouping Bar repeat grouping allows you to condense longer bar repeat regions, which can be helpful in very regular music as it can simplify the overall phrasing. The symbols shown on the staff are different for the different groupings, and two-bar and four-bar repeats also show a number to indicate how many bars are included in the group.
Bar repeats Bar repeat grouping RESULT The grouping in the selected bar repeat regions is changed. Dorico Elements automatically calculates the clearest way to group the region. For example, an eight-bar phrase containing a single notated bar followed by seven one-bar repeats grouped every four bars is automatically shown with a one-bar repeat, two-bar repeat, then four-bar repeat to fill the seven bars. 868 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Rhythm slashes Rhythm slashes are diagonal lines positioned on staves that are used to indicate that performers should play something, but without specifying the exact rhythms and pitches. They are often accompanied by chord symbols to indicate the set of notes the performer should use. There are two different types of rhythm slashes: Slashes with stems Slashes with stems usually indicate the rhythm to be played, but not the pitches. Also known as “rhythmic notation”.
Rhythm slashes Slash regions In Write mode, each region has a handle at the start and end, which you can use to move and lengthen/shorten regions. When two different slash regions are adjacent, they alternate highlight colors to ensure the separate regions are always identifiable.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Multiple slash regions and slash voices can exist at the same rhythmic positions. In multiple-voice contexts for slash voices and when slash regions overlap, Dorico Elements automatically changes their staff position and offset to accommodate all slashes as legibly as possible.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts Changing the staff position of rhythm slashes You can change the staff position of rhythm slashes in both slash voices and slash regions, for example, to accommodate other notes at the same rhythmic positions better. By default, rhythm slashes are positioned on the middle line of the staff. PROCEDURE 1. 2. 3. Select the rhythm slashes whose staff position you want to change.
Rhythm slashes Slashes in multiple-voice contexts EXAMPLE Notes hidden alongside a slash region Notes shown alongside a slash region RELATED LINKS Slash regions on page 869 Slash voices on page 1001 Hiding/Showing slash region highlights on page 870 Inputting slash regions on page 332 Hiding/Showing padding rests before/after slash regions You can hide/show padding rests before/after slash regions that start partway through bars individually, for example, if you have other notes at those positions and
Rhythm slashes Splitting slash regions Splitting slash regions You can split slash regions after they have been input, for example, if you later want to input more precise notation in the middle of an existing slash region. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a slash in each slash region you want to split, immediately to the right of where you want to split them. 2. Press U . RESULT The slash regions are split immediately to the left of the selected slashes.
Rhythm slashes Lengthening/Shortening slash regions RELATED LINKS Slashes in multiple-voice contexts on page 871 Changing the voice direction of slash regions on page 871 Lengthening/Shortening slash regions You can lengthen/shorten slash regions after they have been input. Because multiple slash regions can exist at the same rhythmic position, you can also lengthen/shorten slash regions so they overlap with other slash regions. PROCEDURE 1.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts Slash region counts Slash region counts are numbers shown at regular intervals, either above or below slash regions, to help players keep track of how many bars have passed. The intervals are usually based on typical musical phrases, such as every four or eight bars. By default, slash region counts are shown every four bars and are placed below the staff. Each slash region has its own separate count.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts PROCEDURE 1. Select any part of each slash region whose count frequency you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count frequency in the Slash Regions group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT The count frequency is changed for the selected slash regions.
Rhythm slashes Slash region counts PROCEDURE 1. Select any part of each slash region whose count staff-relative placement you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Count position in the Slash Regions group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Above ● Below RESULT The staff-relative placement of all counts on the selected slash regions is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Rests Rests are markings with a rhythmic value that indicate no note is played for that duration. Each note duration has an equivalent rest, for example, a quarter note rest is different to a sixteenth note rest. All notes and rests within a bar must add up to the duration of the bar, according to the prevailing time signature. The table shows some examples of notes and the rests with the equivalent rhythmic value.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests Rests stay within the staff wherever possible. They do not move above or below the staff when the notes around them are very high or very low. However, on staves with multiple voices, rests are placed higher on the staff, or above the staff, for up-stem voices and lower on the staff, or below the staff, for down-stem voices. Example rest positions in a multiple-voice context Rests in multiple voices must not overlap.
Rests Implicit vs. explicit rests RELATED LINKS Inputting rests on page 187 Inputting notes on page 161 Deleting rests on page 883 Forcing the duration of notes/rests on page 171 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests on page 882 Hiding/Showing rest colors on page 882 Implicit rests in multiple-voice contexts In Dorico Elements, implicit rests are shown automatically to fill in rhythmic positions around notes, including when there are multiple voices on the staff.
Rests Hiding/Showing rest colors RELATED LINKS Moving rests vertically on page 886 Turning explicit rests into implicit rests Implicit rests and explicit rests behave differently. For example, you can hide implicit rests using the Properties panel, but you cannot hide explicit rests or rests with forced durations. NOTE You can only hide implicit rests using Starts voice and Ends voice in the Notes and Rests group of the Properties panel. PROCEDURE 1.
Rests Deleting rests AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can delete rests that you have identified as explicit rests. The implicit rests that replace them now respect the Starts voice and Ends voice properties. Deleting rests You can delete both implicit rests and explicit rests, for example, if you want to hide rests before/ after notes in another voice used to show passing notes. NOTE You cannot delete rests from unpitched percussion instruments. PROCEDURE 1.
Rests Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars Hiding/Showing bar rests in empty bars You can hide/show bar rests in empty bars in each layout independently. For example, you can hide bar rests in full score layouts but show bar rests in part layouts. Bar rests are usually shown in empty bars in music to indicate to performers that they have nothing to play. However, there are contexts in which it is preferable to hide bar rests in empty bars, and instead leave the bar completely empty.
Rests Multi-bar rests positioned at the start of the first bar in a multi-bar rest, that bar remains part of the subsequent multi-bar rest. You can hide/show multi-bar rests in each layout independently in Dorico Elements, and you can hide/show bar number ranges below them. By default, the multi-bar rest bar counts only appear once between the staves of grand staff instruments.
Rests Moving rests vertically Moving rests vertically You can change the vertical position of rests individually, for example, if you want to change the staff line from which a whole bar rest hangs, or you want to show rests for all voices at a particular rhythmic position. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. Moving rests vertically shows multiple rests at that rhythmic position if more than one voice on the staff has a rest of the same duration.
Slurs Slurs are tapered, curved lines that join notes to indicate legato articulation and phrasing. Depending on the context and the instrument to which they apply, slurs can have additional meanings to simply marking phrases. For example, for wind players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played in the same breath and without re-tonguing or re-articulating any notes. For string players, a slur indicates that all the notes in the phrase are played legato and under one bow.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Slur position relative to tie chains There are different conventions for the position of slurs relative to tie chains in music for modern use and historical editions. Modern practice is for slurs to start on the first note in tie chains, and end on the last note in tie chains. This makes the full length of the phrase visually clear to the performer, which helps their performance, and is the default in Dorico Elements.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Slur placement relative to grace notes There are specific placement rules that affect slurs when they start from a grace note and end on a normal note immediately following the grace note. These rules are: ● Slurs connect noteheads rather than stems. ● Slurs are scaled to match the proportions of grace notes. ● Slurs must not obscure ledger lines.
Slurs General placement conventions for slurs Slurs appear between the stems of unbeamed notes when placed on their stem side, and the default setting is for their endpoints to attach a short distance from the end of the stem.
Slurs Slur styles The end of a system showing the first slur part; the end on the right indicates a continuation to the next system. The start of the next system showing the second slur part; the end on the left indicates a continuation from the previous system. RELATED LINKS Nested slurs on page 895 Slur collision avoidance By default, Dorico Elements automatically adjusts the shape and position of slurs to avoid collisions with items under their arc.
Slurs Slur styles Dotted Slurs appear as dotted lines. The dots are the same size and the same distance apart over the whole length of the slur. Half-dashed start The first halves of slurs appear as dashed lines, the second halves as solid lines. Used to denote that a slur was written incompletely in the source in critical editions. Half-dashed end The first halves of slurs appear as solid lines, the second halves as dashed lines.
Slurs Slur curvature direction Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Changing individual slurs to flat slurs Although they are not often used as standard, some publishers use flat slurs in order to reduce the vertical space occupied by slurs. You can change individual slurs to flat slurs. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Slurs Slur curvature direction Up Forces slurs to curve upwards, and appear above notes. Down Forces slurs to curve downwards, and appear below notes. Up/Down Forces slurs to comprise two segments: the first curves upwards, the second curves downwards to create a mirrored S-shape. It is typically used when phrases start in the lower staff and end in the upper staff, for example, in piano parts.
Slurs Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs RESULT The curvature direction of the selected slurs is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. RELATED LINKS Changing the property scope on page 149 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Cross-staff and cross-voice slurs Cross-staff slurs start on one staff and end on another staff, and cross-voice slurs start in one voice and end in another voice.
Slurs Nested slurs A phrase with nested slurs You can input nested slurs in the same ways as inputting standard slurs. By default, Dorico Elements makes automatic adjustments to their positioning to avoid collisions. RELATED LINKS Slur collision avoidance on page 891 Inputting nested slurs You can input nested slurs, both during note input and by adding them to existing notes.
Slurs Moving slurs rhythmically NOTE If you added nested slurs to existing notes, stop here. 5. During note input, input the notes you want to include in the inner slur. The slurs extend automatically as you continue inputting notes, even if there are rests between the notes you input. 6. Press Shift-S once to end the inner slur on the currently selected note. 7. Continue inputting notes. 8. Optional: Start/End other inner slurs. 9.
Slurs Lengthening/Shortening slurs ● Click and drag it to the right/left. RESULT The slur is moved to other noteheads on the staff. NOTE The rhythmic duration of the slur is usually maintained. However, depending on the rhythms it crosses as it moves, the slur may cover longer/shorter durations than before it was moved. Lengthening/Shortening slurs You can change the length of slurs rhythmically after they have been input.
Slurs Linked slurs Linked slurs Slurs of the same duration at the same rhythmic position on multiple staves can be linked together. This happens automatically when you copy and paste slurs or material including slurs between staves, or enter them simultaneously. If slurs are linked, moving one slur in the linked group moves any slurs linked to it in the same way. Similarly, lengthening or shortening a slur in a linked group lengthens or shortens any slurs linked to it in the same way.
Slurs Slurs in playback Unlinking slurs You can unlink slurs manually that were automatically linked together, for example, if you want to lengthen/shorten them independently of each other. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select a slur from each linked group you no longer want to be linked. 2. Choose Edit > Slurs > Unlink. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT All slurs linked to the selected slurs are unlinked. NOTE You cannot only unlink a single slur from the group.
Staff labels Staff labels are used to identify staves in music containing multiple players, and are positioned to the left of systems, before the initial barline of each system. Staff labels indicate the instrument or instruments currently playing the music on the staff or staves to which they apply. It is usual to show instrument names in full in the staff labels for the first systems in each flow, and abbreviated instrument names in the staff labels of subsequent systems.
Staff labels Instrument names in staff labels NOTE Staff labels do not show all instruments held by players, for example, in the staff label for the first system. You should include a comprehensive instrumentation list that shows any doubling at the front of your score. Dorico Elements includes the instrument transposition, or instrument pitch, in staff labels for transposing instruments by default. Transposing instruments are instruments whose sounding pitch is different to the notated pitch.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing staff labels Renaming layouts on page 131 Hiding/Showing staff labels You can show full or abbreviated instrument names in staff labels, or hide all staff labels entirely, in each layout independently. The first system in each flow and all subsequent systems can have different staff label lengths. By default, full staff labels are shown on the first system of each flow and abbreviated staff labels are shown on subsequent systems in full score layouts.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves on page 908 Staff labels for percussion kits on page 907 Changing the minimum indent for systems with staff labels You can change the minimum indent for all systems that show staff labels to optimize horizontal space in each layout independently. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts whose minimum indent for systems with staff labels you want to change.
Staff labels Instrument transpositions in staff labels Hiding/Showing instrument transpositions in staff labels You can hide/show instrument transpositions in staff labels in each layout independently. For example, you can hide instrument transpositions in staff labels in full score layouts but show them in part layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to hide/show instrument transpositions in staff labels.
Staff labels Hiding/Showing instrument change labels at the start of flows 4. 5. In the Staff Labels section, choose one of the following options for Position of instrument pitch in full staff labels: ● Start ● End Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The position of instrument transpositions relative to instrument names in staff labels is changed in the selected layouts.
Staff labels Staff labels for percussion kits Staff labels for percussion kits The staff labels shown for percussion kit staves depend on how kits are presented in your project. Kits can be presented as five-line staves, grids, and as single-line instruments. Percussion kit presentation type Staff label 5-line staff Single instrument name using the instrument name of the percussion kit.
Staff labels Staff labels on condensed staves Edit Percussion Kit dialog on page 109 Unpitched percussion on page 978 Changing the percussion kit presentation type on page 984 Staff labels on condensed staves Staff labels on condensed staves must reflect all the players included on the staff. Dorico Elements automatically consolidates similar instrument names in staff labels on condensed staves but always shows all the required player numbers.
Staves A staff is a line or group of lines on which musical notes are notated to indicate the pitch and rhythm of music. Pitched instruments use the traditional five-line staff and unpitched instruments often use a single-line staff. Notes are positioned on the lines and in the spaces on five-line staves, and can also use ledger lines above/below the staff to represent pitches that cannot fit on the staff.
Staves Extra staves each flow, and fix the number of bars included in each system. You can also select above which staves system objects appear, according to their instrument families. NOTE ● If the size of system object font styles is set to Staff-relative, the staff size of the top staff in each instrument family group affects the size of system objects if they are shown above that bracketed group. Font styles that are set to Absolute are unaffected by staff size.
Staves Ossia staves Ossia staves Ossia staves are smaller staves shown above/below the main staff of an instrument. They are used to show alternative phrases that can be played instead of the original phrase, such as suggestions for ornaments, alternative notations from other sources, or an easier version. In Dorico Elements, you cannot add ossia staves. However, ossia staves are shown if you import or open a project that contains them.
Staves System dividers Hiding/Showing system dividers You can change the circumstances in which system dividers are shown, including specifying the minimum number of players required to show them, in each layout independently. For example, if you only want to show system dividers between systems that contain different numbers of staves. PROCEDURE 1. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-L to open Layout Options. 2. In the Layouts list, select the layouts in which you want to show system dividers.
Staves System objects System objects System objects are items that apply to all staves in the system and appear in all layouts, but are not necessary to show on every staff in full score layouts. For example, tempo marks and rehearsal marks are important for all players to see in their parts, but would cause an orchestral full score to appear very cluttered if they were shown on every staff.
Staves System indents By default, the layout currently open in the music area is selected when you open the dialog. You can select other layouts by using the selection options in the action bar, Shift -clicking adjacent layouts, and Ctrl/Cmd -clicking individual layouts. 3. Click Staves and Systems in the category list. 4. In the System Objects section, activate the checkboxes for the instrument families above which you want system objects to appear. 5.
Staves System indents You can change both the minimum indent on systems with staff labels and the first system indent in each layout independently. You can also adjust the system indent at both the start and end of individual systems, independently of your per-layout settings.
Divisi Divisi is when players split, or “divide”, in order to play multiple lines of music, commonly for a limited passage, before returning to play together, or “tutti”. Divisi passages can be notated with all lines on a single staff or across multiple staves. Divisi is a technique most commonly used in orchestral string writing, as the string section typically contains a large number of players compared to the number of staves.
Tablature Tablature is an alternative notation to the five-line staff, and is used for fretted instruments. On tablature, pitches are indicated by fret numbers positioned on lines, each of which represents a string on the instrument. As tablature is commonly used for guitars, it usually shows six lines.
Tablature Rhythms on tablature Guitar techniques on page 778 Ties on page 938 Trills on page 744 Rhythms on tablature When notation staves and tablature are both shown, it is customary only to notate rhythms on the notation staff. However, when only tablature is shown, it is necessary to show rhythms on tablature.
Tablature Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature ● To show only notation staves and hide tablature, choose Notation only. ● To show both notation staves and tablature, choose Notation and tablature. ● To show only tablature and hide notation staves, choose Tablature only. 5. Optional: If you chose Notation and tablature or Tablature only, activate/deactivate Show rhythms in tablature. 6. Click Apply, then Close.
Tablature Changing the allocated string for notes on tablature NOTE You must select fret numbers on tablature, you cannot select the notes on notation staves. 2. Change their allocated string in any of the following ways: ● To move them up a string, press N . ● To move them down a string, press M . ● In the Properties panel, select a string from the String menu in the Notes and Rests group. RESULT The string to which the selected notes are allocated is changed.
Stems Stems are vertical lines that extend from noteheads that are a half note or shorter in duration. In combination with notehead design, they allow the duration of each note to be clearly identified. For example, quarter notes (crotchets) and eighth notes (quavers) both have solid black noteheads and stems, but eighth notes also have flags on their stems. 16th notes have two flags, 32nd notes have three flags, and so on.
Stems Stem direction The default stem direction depends on the instrument type. By default, the stems of notes on the middle lines of staves point downwards on instrumental staves and upwards on vocal staves, to avoid lyrics.
Stems Stem direction chords. If they both have the same stem direction, the chord matches them. If the adjacent notes, beam groups, or chords have different stem directions, equally balanced chords follow the default stem direction. The default stem direction depends on the instrument type. By default, the stems of notes on the middle lines of staves point downwards on instrumental staves and upwards on vocal staves, to avoid lyrics.
Stems Stem direction TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RESULT The stem direction of the selected notes is changed. The selected notes follow this stem direction, even if you later change their pitch to one that usually requires a different stem direction. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain. NOTE ● This does not change the voice to which notes belong.
Stems Stem length TIP You can also choose these options from the context menu. RELATED LINKS Stem direction on page 921 Removing stem direction changes You can remove changes to the directions of stems and revert stems to their default directions. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose stem direction changes you want to remove. 2. Choose Edit > Stem > Remove Forced Stem. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT All stem direction changes are removed from the selected notes.
Tempo marks Tempo marks indicate how fast music is played, often with a combination of text instructions and metronome marks. They are also known as “tempo changes”, “tempo indications”, and “tempo markings”. A tempo mark can show text instructions, a metronome mark, or a combination of the two.
Tempo marks Types of tempo marks Positions of tempo marks on page 929 System objects on page 913 Changing the positions of system objects on page 913 Changing the tempo mode on page 463 Types of tempo marks Dorico Elements groups tempo marks into different types according to their function and effect on the music. The following tempo changes are available in the Tempo panel in Write mode, but you can also input all types of tempo changes using the tempo popover.
Tempo marks Tempo mark components Text shown Shows text when activated, and no text when deactivated. Metronome mark shown Shows metronome marks when activated, and no metronome marks when deactivated. Parenthesized Shows metronome marks in parentheses when activated, and without parentheses when deactivated. This also applies to approximate metronome marks. Is approximate Shows metronome marks as approximate when activated, and absolute when deactivated.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks ● Metronome mark shown ● Parenthesized ● Is approximate ● Approximate appearance (only available if Is approximate is activated) ● Show equals sign (only available if Is approximate is activated) RESULT The selected tempo marks are changed to include the corresponding components. NOTE If you have activated none of these properties, no tempo mark is shown in the music. Instead, a signpost indicates the position of the tempo mark.
Tempo marks Positions of tempo marks at the rhythmic position of a tempo mark, it is convention to align the tempo mark with the accidental. If a repeat mark occurs mid-system and is not treated as a barline, tempo marks are aligned with the repeat mark. When a tempo mark includes both text and a metronome mark, the text appears first, followed by the metronome mark. When horizontal space is tight, the metronome mark can be positioned below the tempo mark text.
Tempo marks Changing tempo text Changing tempo text You can change the text of existing tempo marks individually. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tempo marks whose tempo text you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, enter the tempo text you want into the Text field in the Tempo group. 3. Press Return . RESULT The tempo text for the selected tempo marks is changed. TIP You can also change the tempo text by opening the tempo popover and changing the entry.
Tempo marks Hiding/Showing tempo marks Hiding/Showing tempo marks You can hide/show the different components in individual tempo marks without changing the speed of playback. This affects their appearance in all layouts. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tempo marks you want to hide, or the signposts of tempo marks you want to show. 2.
Tempo marks Metronome marks Metronome marks can be precise, such as = 176, or can indicate an acceptable range, such as = 152-176. They can also be shown in parentheses, which is useful if the metronome mark is intended as a guide rather than a fixed value. By default, metronome marks appear as integers and do not show decimal places. If you input a metronome mark with a decimal place, it is rounded to the nearest integer.
Tempo marks Metronome marks Showing the metronome mark value as a range You can show the metronome mark value of individual absolute tempo marks as a range. For example, you can use this to indicate that any speed within the given range is musically appropriate for the piece. NOTE These steps do not apply to gradual tempo changes or reset/relative tempo marks. PROCEDURE 1. Select the absolute tempo marks whose metronome mark values you want to show as a range. 2.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes 2. In the Properties panel, change the value for Final tempo % in the Tempo group. 3. Press Return . RESULT The final tempo at the end of the selected gradual tempo changes is changed. For example, if you change the value to 20 on a gradual tempo change that started at 100 bpm, the final tempo is 20% of 100 bpm, which is 20 bpm. If you change the value to 120 on a gradual tempo change that started at 100 bpm, the final tempo is 120% of 100 bpm, which is 120 bpm.
Tempo marks Gradual tempo changes NOTE Key commands lengthen/shorten items by moving their end only. ● Click and drag the circular handle at the start/end to the right/left. RESULT The selected gradual tempo changes are lengthened/shortened according to the current rhythmic grid resolution. Changing the style of gradual tempo changes You can change the style of individual gradual tempo changes.
Tempo marks Tempo equations Changing the line style of gradual tempo changes You can change the line style of individual gradual tempo changes whose style includes a continuation line. NOTE This does not affect the appearance of gradual tempo changes with the text-only style. PROCEDURE 1. Select the gradual tempo changes whose line style you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Line style in the Tempo group. 3.
Ties A tie is a curved line that joins two notes of the same pitch. When notes are longer than the maximum duration of a bar in the prevailing time signature, they automatically appear in Dorico Elements as tie chains, that is, a sequence of adjacent notes joined with ties. Each sequence of ties, whether they join two notes or ten notes together, represents a single note with the duration of all the tied notes combined.
Ties General placement conventions for ties ● Articulations can only appear once on each tie chain, either at the start or the end, depending on the type of articulation. For example, staccato marks appear at the end whereas accents appear at the start. You can change the positions of articulations relative to individual tie chains.
Ties Ties vs. slurs The vertical placement of ties is also automatically adjusted in Dorico Elements so that neither of the end points of ties, nor the apex of tie curves, starts or ends on a staff line. If this happens, it can cause the shape of ties to appear distorted, which makes the music harder to read. To avoid this, Dorico Elements changes the vertical position of ties slightly, and makes small changes to the curvature of ties.
Ties Tie styles Two long notes tied together Two phrases with slurs Slurs indicate articulation, such as bowing or breathing, and normally group notes of different pitches together. Slurs can join two noteheads together with any number of pitches in between. They often indicate the shaping of phrases. Slurs can also be used in conjunction with articulation. Unlike ties, articulation within slurs can affect the sound throughout the phrase.
Ties Tie styles Editorial Ties appear as solid black lines, but with a smaller vertical line intersecting them exactly halfway along their length. Used to show that ties were added by the editor and were not present in the source. Changing the style of ties You can change the style of individual ties. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. By default, all ties are solid.
Ties Tie curvature direction PROCEDURE 1. Select the dashed/dotted ties whose dash/dot size you want to change. NOTE You can only select whole tie chains, and any changes to tie chains only affect the first tie in the chain. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Dash/dot in the Ties group. 3. Change the value in the value field. RESULT Increasing the value makes dashes/dots bigger, decreasing the value makes dashes/dots smaller.
Ties Non-standard ties Changing the curvature direction of ties You can change the curvature direction of ties individually, including individual ties within tie chains. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains. PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the ties whose curvature direction you want to change.
Ties Non-standard ties The start of a tie chain before a system break The end of the same tie chain after a system break Tied notes with accidentals across system breaks and page breaks The ends of ties for tied notes with accidentals across system breaks and page breaks are also automatically positioned. As tied notes in Dorico Elements are treated as one note notated to fit in time signatures, cautionary accidentals at the start of new systems/frames are not shown by default.
Ties Hiding/Showing laissez vibrer ties Notes leading into a chord notated Notes leading into a chord notated Multiple grace notes before a as a series of tied chords as tied non-adjacent notes chord with ties between nonadjacent notes Ties between different voices You can input ties between notes of the same pitch in different voices belonging to the same instrument.
Ties Deleting ties EXAMPLE Phrase without laissez vibrer ties Phrase with laissez vibrer ties Deleting ties You can delete ties without deleting the notes to which they are attached. NOTE Deleting ties from tie chains removes all ties in the tie chain. If you want to remove single ties from longer tie chains, you can split the tie chain. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the tie chains from which you want to delete all ties. 2. Press U . RESULT All ties in the selected tie chains are deleted.
Ties Splitting tie chains 3. ● To move the caret according to the current rhythmic grid resolution, Press Right Arrow / Left Arrow . ● To advance the caret to the next rhythmic position according to the note value currently selected, press Space . ● To move the caret to the next/previous bar, press Ctrl/Cmd-Right Arrow / Ctrl/CmdLeft Arrow . Split the tie chain in any of the following ways: ● Press U ● In the Notes toolbox, click Scissors . 4.
Time signatures Time signatures indicate the meter of music, and apply to all bars from where they first appear until a subsequent change of time signature. Meter describes the rhythmic pulse of music, and its division into beats and bars. A time signature is made up of two parts: numerator on top, and denominator underneath. These are the same mathematical terms as are used for fractions due to their similar arrangement. 1 Numerator Specifies the number of beats in each bar for the time signature.
Time signatures General conventions for time signatures A 5/8 time signature input before an existing 4/4 time signature without Insert mode activated, leaving only three eighth note beats in the second 5/8 bar.
Time signatures Types of time signatures Large time signatures on page 954 Changing the size and position of time signatures on page 955 Types of time signatures There are different types of time signatures, which can indicate various and complex meters. NOTE Dorico Elements uses the definitions for meters commonly used in American English. These definitions, such as which meters are considered simple and compound, might be different in other languages.
Time signatures Types of time signatures Interchangeable An interchangeable time signature indicates a set of time signatures at the start of the piece that can be used during the piece, such as 3/4–2/4. Unlike alternating time signatures, interchangeable time signatures do not require a fixed pattern; any bar in the piece can follow any of the time signatures in the set without having to restate the time signature.
Time signatures Pick-up bars Pick-up bars Pick-up bars allow you to include music before the first full bar. They are also known as “upbeats” or an “anacrusis”. Often, pick-up bars only comprise a few beats whose main purpose is to lead in to the start of the piece. Pick-up bar of a single quarter note beat at the start of Chopin's Mazurka Op. 30 No. 2 Pieces that start with a pick-up bar have time signatures that are positioned at the start of the system as normal.
Time signatures Large time signatures RESULT Irregular bars at the start of the selected time signatures are defined as pick-up bars when Group first bar as pick-up and its corresponding checkbox are both activated, and defined as normal irregular bars when the corresponding checkbox is deactivated. When the property is deactivated, Dorico Elements uses internal heuristics to define them as either pick-up bars or normal irregular bars automatically.
Time signatures Large time signatures Large time signatures shown on bracketed groups occupy horizontal space, which can be a significant amount when they are especially large and use the standard time signature design. Therefore, we recommend that you use one of the narrow designs in layouts that show large time signatures on bracketed groups.
Time signatures Time signature styles 5. ● Show on every staff ● Show once per bracket ● Show at system object positions Click Apply, then Close. RESULT The size and position of time signatures in the selected layouts is changed. Showing large time signatures above the staff at system object positions means they do not occupy any rhythmic or horizontal space, whereas the other options do cause time signatures to occupy horizontal space.
Time signatures Time signature styles X open style Penderecki’s symbol open style No symbol open style Interchangeable time signature separator styles Interchangeable time signatures can have different separator styles. You can specify the separator style when inputting interchangeable time signatures using the popover and for individual interchangeable time signatures after they have been input.
Time signatures Time signature styles PROCEDURE 1. Select the time signatures whose denominator style you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Denominator style in the Time Signatures group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Number ● Note ● None RESULT The denominator style of the selected time signatures is changed. Changing the open meter style of time signatures You can change the open meter style of individual time signatures. PROCEDURE 1.
Time signatures Positions of time signatures ● Parentheses ● Brackets ● Equals sign ● Slash ● Space ● Hyphen RESULT The separator style of the selected interchangeable time signatures is changed. TIP ● You can specify the separator style when inputting interchangeable time signatures using the popover. ● Although they might look similar to interchangeable time signatures, aggregate time signatures behave differently.
Time signatures Hiding/Showing time signatures ● Time signatures can only be moved along staves. If you want to move a time signature across staves, you must delete the time signature and input a new time signature on the other staff. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the time signatures you want to move. 2. Move the time signatures according to the current rhythmic grid resolution in any of the following ways: ● Press Alt/Opt-Right Arrow to move them to the right.
Time signatures Changing the design of time signatures You can choose to print time signature signposts if you activate View options in the Annotations section of the Print Options panel on the right of the window in Print mode. ● You can assign a key command for Hide/Show Item on the Key Commands page in Preferences, which applies to chord symbols, playing techniques, figured bass, text objects, and time signatures.
Time signatures Deleting time signatures RESULT The time signatures are deleted from the score. Bars after their previous positions are re-barred according to the previous time signature in the score, up until the next time signature or the end of the flow. If you delete the only time signature in the flow, your music appears in an open meter, but with all the same rhythmic values. RELATED LINKS Types of time signatures on page 951 962 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Tremolos Tremolos are thick, slanted lines that cross individual stems or are positioned between multiple stems. They are used to indicate that notes are repeated, either individually or in sequences of multiple notes. Using tremolo strokes instead of notating each notehead can save horizontal space and make fast passages easier to read. The number of tremolo strokes indicates both how many times notes are repeated and how fast they are.
Tremolos General placement conventions for tremolos Measured tremolos The number of tremolo strokes corresponds to a precise rhythm in the prevailing tempo and meter. Unmeasured tremolos There is no link between the number of strokes and rhythm. Instead, unmeasured tremolos are played as fast as possible, whatever the tempo. Unmeasured tremolos often use three or more tremolo strokes, and can also be accompanied by a “trem.” text indication.
Tremolos Changing the speed of tremolos Changing the speed of tremolos You can change the speed of tremolos after they have been input by changing the number of strokes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the notes with tremolos whose speed you want to change. The buttons with the number of tremolo strokes corresponding to your selection are highlighted in the Tremolos section of the Repeat Structures panel. NOTE Select single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolos separately. 2.
Tremolos Rhythmic positions of notes with tremolos Rhythmic positions of notes with tremolos You can move notes with single-note tremolos and multi-note tremolos to new rhythmic positions in the same ways as normal notes. However, if you move multi-note tremolos across barlines, the tremolo strokes are deleted automatically. You can move single-note tremolos to new rhythmic positions and across barlines without affecting their tremolo strokes.
Tuplets Tuplets indicate where a beat is divided into a different number of subdivisions than is usually expected according to the current meter. They can be used to fit more notes or fewer notes in a beat than usually exist in a beat, according to the usual pattern of subdivision.
Tuplets Nested tuplets The horizontal position of tuplet brackets should allow it to be immediately obvious which notes are included in the bracket. They should not extend so far that notes following the tuplet appear to be included. A tuplet clearly showing the three quarter notes included in the triplet. With an extended tuplet bracket, the duration of the triplet is now unclear. Nested tuplets Nested tuplets are tuplets within larger tuplets that are often used to create complex rhythms.
Tuplets Turning existing notes into tuplets ● Move the caret with the arrow keys to return to inputting normal notes. RESULT The pitches you enter or play in are input as nested tuplets, starting from the caret position. If multiples of the inner tuplet fit exactly inside the outer tuplet, you can continue inputting notes as the specified nested tuplet until you stop the tuplets manually.
Tuplets Allowing/Disallowing tuplets to span barlines NOTE You must not select any of the noteheads in the tuplets. 2. Optional: If you want to retain all notes in the selected tuplets, press I to activate Insert mode. 3. Press Backspace or Delete . RESULT All notes in the selected tuplets are unscaled and appear as normal notes with the same notated duration, for example, a tuplet quarter note becomes a standard quarter note.
Tuplets Moving tuplets rhythmically RELATED LINKS Barlines on page 558 Beaming notes together manually on page 577 Tuplet brackets on page 973 Tuplet numbers/ratios on page 975 Moving tuplets rhythmically You can move tuplets to different rhythmic positions after they have been input, including independently of tuplet brackets and tuplet numbers/ratios. Moving notes beyond the boundaries of a tuplet turns them back into normal notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the tuplets you want to move.
Tuplets Deleting tuplets EXAMPLE An eighth note triplet in the last beat of a bar The same triplet moved one eighth note to the right, crossing the barline Deleting tuplets You can delete tuplets, including all the tuplet notes, but you can also delete tuplet brackets and numbers/ratios without deleting the corresponding notes. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the tuplets you want to delete.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets Unbeaming notes on page 578 Splitting beam groups on page 576 Changing the direction of partial beams on page 578 Changing beam slants on page 580 Tuplet brackets Tuplet brackets show the duration of tuplets that are not joined by beams, such as triplet quarter notes, by showing the notes within the tuplet under a bracket.
Tuplets Tuplet brackets RELATED LINKS Signposts on page 349 Hiding/Showing tuplet numbers/ratios on page 976 Changing the property scope on page 149 Copying property settings to other layouts/frame chains on page 395 Changing the staff-relative placement of tuplet brackets You can show individual tuplet brackets and tuplet numbers/ratios above or below the staff or between staves. You can do this for the current layout and frame chain only or for all layouts and frame chains.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios 2. In the Properties panel, activate End position in the Tuplets group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● End at right-hand side of final note ● End immediately before following note ● End at position of final tuplet division RESULT The end position for the selected tuplet brackets is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios NOTE You can use properties in the Tuplets group of the Properties panel to edit individual tuplet numbers/ratios; however, the Tuplets group is only shown if you select tuplet numbers/ratios or brackets. It is not shown if you select notes within the tuplet, or notes within the tuplet and the tuplet number/ratio or bracket. Hiding/Showing tuplet numbers/ratios You can hide/show tuplet numbers/ratios individually.
Tuplets Tuplet numbers/ratios PROCEDURE 1. Select the tuplet brackets whose tuplet number/ratio positions you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Center in the Tuplets group. 3. Choose one of the following options: ● Visual ● Rhythmic RESULT The horizontal position of tuplet numbers/ratios on the selected tuplets is changed. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Unpitched percussion The term “unpitched percussion” covers all percussion instruments that are not tuned to specific pitches. This includes instruments such as bass drum, guiro, maracas, cymbals, and shakers. Dorico Elements provides comprehensive support for unpitched percussion notation, with flexible options for combining music for multiple instruments into percussion kits that can then be displayed differently in different layouts.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets NOTE Kit instruments in player cards in the Players panel in Setup mode are colored green, whereas individual percussion instruments not part of percussion kits are colored the same light blue as all other instruments. Percussion kits and drum sets A percussion kit is a collection of unpitched percussion instruments that are played by a single player. Drum sets are a particular type of percussion kit that are often used in pop and rock music.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kits and drum sets Exporting percussion kits You can export percussion kits as .doricolib files. This allows you to use kits again without having to create them from scratch. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel in Setup mode, expand the card of the player whose percussion kit you want to export. 2. Click the arrow that appears in the kit instrument label when you hover over it and choose Edit Percussion Kit to open the Edit Percussion Kit dialog. 3.
Unpitched percussion Moving notes to different instruments in percussion kits Moving notes to different instruments in percussion kits You can move notes to different instruments in the same percussion kit after they have been input, except in layouts using the single-line instruments kit presentation type. In layouts using the single-line instruments kit presentation type, you can instead cross notes to other staves to create cross-staff beams. PROCEDURE 1.
Unpitched percussion Notations on notes in percussion kits You can switch to the single-line instruments presentation type to input cross-rhythms on each instrument separately. When you switch back to the grid or five-line staff kit presentation types, Dorico Elements attempts to resolve the rhythmic conflicts. ● Conflicting tuplets: One tuplet is moved into an extra voice for the duration of the conflict.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types in the grid and five-line staff presentation types independently of the single-line instruments presentation type. RELATED LINKS Input methods for dynamics on page 243 Percussion kit presentation types You can show percussion kits in three different presentation types, which can be different in each layout in your project. NOTE Dynamics are not shared between the grid/five-line staff presentation types and the singleline instruments presentation type.
Unpitched percussion Percussion kit presentation types Single-line instruments Kit instruments are shown as individual instruments with their own lines. Normal-sized staff labels are shown for each instrument. The editing area in the Edit Percussion Kit dialog lists all of the instruments in the order in which they appear in the score.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments RELATED LINKS Percussion kit presentation types on page 983 Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments As well as using normal playing techniques, you can also use the design and position of noteheads to indicate different playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments and percussion kits.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments 1 Playing technique-specific noteheads list Contains the main playing technique-specific noteheads currently defined for the selected percussion instrument, showing the notehead set and the staff position corresponding to the playing technique as applicable. You can add new playing technique-specific noteheads for unpitched percussion instruments.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments NOTE Overrides for articulations and tremolos are not currently reflected in playback, but this is planned for future versions.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments ● Default Notehead: Displays the notehead used by default for the playing technique in the corresponding row of the table. ● Notehead Override: Displays the notehead override used in five-line staff presentations for the playing technique in the corresponding row of the table. You can change the notehead override by clicking it and selecting another notehead from the menu.
Unpitched percussion Playing techniques for unpitched percussion instruments Playing techniques on page 813 Showing brackets on noteheads on page 729 Changing the notehead design of individual noteheads on page 723 Creating new playing technique-specific noteheads for unpitched percussion instruments You can define new playing technique-specific noteheads for unpitched percussion instruments individually, which are saved for that type of percussion instrument in your project.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Overriding the appearance of playing technique-specific noteheads It might be necessary to override the appearance of playing technique-specific noteheads in order to disambiguate the notes for one instrument from another if they share a staff position in five-line staff kit presentations. PROCEDURE 1. In the Players panel in Setup mode, expand the card of the player holding the kit whose playing technique-specific noteheads you want to override. 2.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Percussion legends appear as signposts if there are no instruments sounding at their position, or when the layout uses the grid presentation type. Percussion legends do not appear at all in layouts using the single-line instrument presentation type. NOTE ● Percussion legends only appear in the layout in which they were added. If you want to show percussion legends in multiple layouts, you must add them in each layout.
Unpitched percussion Percussion legends Changing the sounding instrument percussion legend range You can change the rhythmic range of sounding instrument percussion legends to include more/ fewer instruments in the legend, as they only show the instruments playing at the rhythmic positions included in the range. PROCEDURE 1. In Write mode, select the sounding instrument percussion legend whose range you want to change. 2.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits Adding percussion legends to five-line staff kit presentations on page 991 Showing short instrument names in percussion legends Percussion legends use full instrument names by default, but you can choose to use short names to save space. PROCEDURE 1. Select the percussion legends whose instrument name lengths you want to change. 2. In the Properties panel, activate Use short names in the Percussion Legends group.
Unpitched percussion Voices in percussion kits Changing the voice of individual notes in percussion kits You can override the default voice for individual notes in percussion kits, including drum sets. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose voice you want to override. 2. Choose Edit > Percussion > Change Voice > [Voice]. For example, to change notes to the second down-stem voice, choose Edit > Percussion > Change Voice > Down-stem Voice 2. You can also choose this option from the context menu.
Unpitched percussion Unpitched percussion in Play mode Unpitched percussion in Play mode Unpitched percussion instruments are handled differently in Play mode than pitched instruments. Instead of showing the usual piano roll view, the onset of each note on each percussion instrument is shown in the drum editor. You can expand each instrument in a kit at the left end of the track header in order to assign that particular instrument to another playback endpoint.
Unpitched percussion Universal Indian Drum Notation Because of these different approaches, mapping information between the MusicXML representation and the Dorico Elements representation can be challenging, so Dorico Elements employs heuristics to improve the quality of results. Typically, drum set instruments in MusicXML files exported from both Sibelius and Finale are imported quite cleanly into Dorico Elements.
Voices For many instruments, such as flute or trombone, each staff usually contains a single musical line in a single voice that is read from left to right along the staff. When multiple, independent lines must be shown in a single staff, each line can be a separate voice. The most common use for showing multiple voices in a single staff is in vocal music, when the soprano and alto lines share a single staff and the tenor and bass lines share another staff.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts TIP You can also identify voices by selecting individual notes and looking at the display in the status bar. EXAMPLE Voice colors shown AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If showing voice colors reveals some notes are not in the voice you want, you can change their voice.
Voices Note positions in multiple-voice contexts 2. Stem to stem, which does not allow noteheads to overlap. This voice order keeps notes in different voices separate. Dorico Elements positions notes by default with the noteheads partially overlapping, in order to minimize the horizontal space they occupy and to maintain the clarity of the rhythm.
Voices Unused voices PREREQUISITE You have chosen the appropriate property scope for local properties. PROCEDURE 1. Select the notes whose order you want to change. 2. Choose Edit > Voices > Swap Voice Order. You can also choose this option from the context menu. RESULT The voice order of the selected notes is changed by changing their voice column index. If the property scope was set to Locally, this change only takes effect in the current layout and frame chain.
Voices Notes crossed to staves with existing notes in other voices Notes crossed to staves with existing notes in other voices When you create cross-staff beams by crossing notes to staves that already contain notes, the stem direction of the existing notes may change. This is due to how multiple voices at the same rhythmic position are handled in Dorico Elements.
Voices Slash voices You can have multiple slash voices active at the same time. To accommodate all slash voices in multiple-voice contexts, Dorico Elements changes their staff position automatically. However, you can also change the staff position of rhythm slashes manually.
Voices Slash voices Adding slash voices to percussion kits You can add slash voices to percussion kits, for example, to show the desired rhythm for a passage without specifying the instruments to be played. You can add multiple slash voices to the same kit, including slash voices with and without stems. NOTE Rhythm slashes in percussion kits only appear when the five-line staff presentation is used. They do not appear in grid or single-line instrument presentations. PROCEDURE 1.
Glossary A action The mechanism inside pianos that allows the hammers to strike the strings with different forces, depending on the strength with which the player depresses the corresponding key. It allows pianos to use a greater dynamic range, hence their full name “pianoforte”. anacrusis See pick-up bar. articulation (1) In music notation, symbols that indicate how a note should be played, typically affecting their onset (attack), release, or duration.
Glossary switches to and controls in each sound library using expression maps. In Dorico Elements, each instrument track has 127 available MIDI CCs, each with a value range from 0 to 127. Because MIDI CC does not use notes on a MIDI keyboard, it allows you to use the full range of MIDI keyboard notes for note input. However, it is therefore harder to trigger MIDI CC whilst recording notes. See also MIDI, PC.
Glossary as a “muted”, “muffled”, “ghost”, or “silenced” note. In Dorico Elements, only notes belonging to fretted instruments, such as the guitar or banjo, can be dead notes. disclosure arrow A small arrow that is shown on all edges of the main window in Dorico Elements. It allows you to hide/show the toolbar and panels individually. divisi Italian for “divide” or “divided”, divisi is when players split in order to play multiple lines of music.
Glossary F family Instruments of a similar kind that are typically bracketed together in a score, such as woodwind, brass, percussion, and strings. fermata A notation that indicates all notes at that position are held for longer than their notated length. It is most commonly shown as a curved line with a dot under the curve, but it can also be shown with a pointed arch or square shape. Also known as a “pause” or a “birds’ eye”.
Glossary group A collection of players that comprises either a subset of the main ensemble, for example, a choir within an orchestra, or a separate group, for example, an off-stage brass group or second orchestra. Each group of players is labeled separately in the full score and is grouped and numbered together in the instrument order. See also player.
Glossary instrument Anything that requires at least one staff to represent the sounds or music it produces. Common instruments include the violin, flute, tuba, and bass drum. However, human voices, computer triggering samples, and tape recordings can also be instruments. instrument transposition The interval difference between the pitch the instrument plays and the resulting sounding pitch, often included as part of the instrument name.
Glossary MIDI An abbreviation for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, a standard for how electronic musical instruments, computers, and virtual instruments can connect to and communicate with each other. In Dorico Elements, MIDI data can be sent to one of 16 channels, which allow either a specific instrument, or a specific patch on a specific instrument, to receive and respond to the data. See also channel, patch, CC, PC.
Glossary P padding The minimum distance/gap between two items, such as text and its enclosure. Padding values can be independent of other set values, such as minimum height or width. padding rest A rest that fills the extra rhythmic space before or after cues that start or end partway through bars. This shows clearly how the rhythm of the cue fits within the current time signature and how it relates to the player’s existing material.
Glossary player A musician who plays one or more instruments. Players are defined as either solo players or section players and are assigned to flows and layouts. See also solo player, section player, flow, layout. playhead A vertical line that moves alongside music during playback and when recording, showing the current rhythmic position. Also known as a “playback line”.
Glossary by live performers, and can be useful when importing/exporting MIDI data as quantized music produces neater notation. R rastral size The size of a full five-line staff, measured from the bottom line to the top line. The term comes from the rastra engravers historically used to draw five-line staves on blank paper. Because the rastrum is a fixed object, people became used to their set sizes and Dorico Elements continues this tradition by offering users a selection of rastral staff sizes.
Glossary spacing The act of determining the horizontal distance between successive columns in order to format the music. Horizontal spacing in Dorico Elements considers the graphical shape and size of notes and other items, such as rhythm dots and accidentals, and the note spacing values set. Full systems are automatically horizontally justified. spelling The way in which a note of a given pitch is specified by a letter name plus an accidental.
Glossary token A code used in a text string that is automatically replaced by a piece of information from elsewhere in the project, such as the title of the current flow, the name of the player, or the page number. Also known as a “wildcard” or “text code”. touchpad Any flat device with a tactile sensor that functions as an alternative to the traditional computer mouse. Commonly built into laptop computers but can also be separate appliances connected wirelessly or via a cable.
Glossary VST instrument Short for “Virtual Studio Technology instrument”, it is a digital plug-in that converts MIDI data into audio output. It can emulate an existing piece of studio hardware or can be an entirely new creation. W Write mode A mode in Dorico Elements where you can input and edit your music, including changing the rhythmic positions of items, changing the pitch of notes, and deleting notes and items. See also modes. 1016 Dorico Elements 3.5.
Index A abbreviated dates 401 dynamics 628, 640 staff labels 109, 902, 903 tempo text 931 absolute channel change actions 501 absolute tempo changes 927 components 927 Academico font 396 accelerando. See gradual tempo changes. See also trills accents. See articulations acciaccaturas. See grace notes accidental duration rules 545 common practice 545 accidental spelling 187 changing 200 accidentals 541 altered unisons.
Index alignment (continued) gradual dynamics 632 instrument names 132 lines 826, 832 lyrics 701, 711 notes 998, 999. See also voice column index octave line numerals 625 ornaments 742 pedal lines 803 playing techniques 821 repeat endings 855 rests 879 staff labels 132 tempo marks 929 text 308, 404 trills 743 voices 998, 999. See also voice column index allegretto. See tempo marks allowing. See activating.
Index articulations (continued) panel 146 percussion 511, 981, 985 pitch before duration 168 placement 549–551 playback 460, 489, 511–513, 551 playing technique-specific noteheads 511 position 548–550 slurs 549, 551, 890 stems 549 ties 550, 551, 938 tremolos 511 tuplets 209 types 547 artificial harmonics 733 accidentals 736 changing 740 hiding 734 partials 735 pitch 735 playback 733–735 showing 734 styles 737, 740 assigning expression maps to endpoints 488 flows to layouts 93, 126 instruments to endpoints
Index bar numbers (continued) frequency 563 galley view 34 guide 566 hiding 563, 566, 569 layout options 563 moving 567, 568 multi-bar rests 565 multiple positions 567 paragraph styles 566 pick-up bars 953 position 567, 568 ranges 565 rehearsal marks 842 repeat sections 573 returning to primary sequence 573 sequence changes 570 showing 563, 566 signposts 349 staff-relative placement 567 subordinate 572 subsequent repeats 573 system-relative placement 569 time signatures 569 bar repeats 861 bar numbers 565
Index bars (continued) length 553 moving 387 multi-bar rests 884, 885 navigation 347 note grouping 20, 590 numbers 563 panel 238, 239 pick-up bars 953 popover 235, 236, 238 repeat 853, 857, 861 rests. See bar rests selecting 338 splitting 555 timecodes 851 tuplets 970 upbeats. See pick-up bars vibrato. See vibrato bar. See also guitar width 382 Bars and Barlines panel 238, 239, 242 Bartók pizzicato. See playing techniques base switches 492, 500 baseline text 308 bass clef. See clefs bass guitar.
Index bottom panel 31 bowing. See playing techniques boxes. See borders.
Index casting off 385 bars per system 385 copying to other layouts 393, 394 staff spacing 408 systems per frame 386 categories templates 55, 594 cautionary accidentals 545 hiding 542, 736 parentheses 545 showing 542, 736 tie chains 542, 736, 945 trills 748 cautionary fingering 665 cautionary key signatures 699 CC64 pedal lines 66, 208 centered beams 581 creating 582 removing 582 centered text hairpins 640 centimeters unit of measurement 45 chains frames 366 ties 938 change labels instruments 102, 103 chann
Index chord symbols (continued) no chord 251 omissions 251 pitch 127 playback 452, 453 players 253, 600, 605 polychords 251, 255 popover 249 position 604 quality 255, 601 regions. See chord symbol regions root 255, 601 roots 250 selecting 334, 337–339 showing 253, 256, 600, 601, 605 signposts 349, 598, 601 slash regions 600, 601, 869 staves 253, 600, 605 suspensions 251 systems 605 track.
Index colors background 44 bar repeats 864 chord diagrams 612, 614 chord symbol regions 604 dark theme 43 graphics 536 light theme 43 monochrome 536 note ranges 727 noteheads 722 pages 44 resetting 44 rests 882 slash regions 870 tablature 727, 917, 919 text 308 voices 997 windows 43 columns accidentals 543 figured bass 651 lines 827 voices 998, 999 combinations playback techniques 499, 503, 511 tremolos 511 combined dynamics. See dynamics combining.
Index conventions (continued) caesuras 690 dynamics 629 fermatas 689 fingerings 661 glissando lines 763 grace notes 683 harp pedaling 798 key signatures 693, 696 lyrics 701 ornaments 742 pauses 689 pedal lines 803 playing techniques 815 rehearsal marks 839 rests 879 tempo marks 929 ties 939 time signatures 950 tremolos 964 trills 742 tuplets 967 voices 998 converting layouts to graphics files 525 notes into tuplets 969 PDF 525 tuplets into normal notes 969 copies printing multiple 522 copying 350–352 artic
Index custom barline joins 561 chord diagrams 613 endpoint configurations 484 layouts 93 markers 318, 846 note sizes 724 page size 533 paper size 533 playback templates 473, 476, 479 player order 98 repeat markers 858 score layouts. See layouts staff order 98 staff size 384 tonality systems. See custom tonality systems trill speeds 755 tuning 116, 118, 119, 609, 610 custom playing techniques playback 512 custom score layouts.
Index deleting (continued) beams 578 beats 236, 553 breath marks 350 caesuras 350 centered beams 582 clefs 618 comments 350, 358 dynamics 436, 636 empty pages 21 endpoints 484, 486 fermatas 350 figured bass 350 fingerings 665 flow headings 379 flows 124, 126 frame breaks 388 frames 379 gaps between notes 170 glissando lines 350 grace notes 350 groups from percussion kits 114 guitar bends 350 guitar post-bends 777 guitar pre-bends 777 guitar techniques 785 Insert mode 179 instrument transpositions 132, 905
Index direction (continued) slur curvature 893, 894 stems 921, 923–925 string shift indicators 672, 726 tie curvature 939, 943, 944 transposing 202, 203 direction playback techniques 513 disabling. See enabling.
Index drum sets (continued) importing 980 inputting notes 180 naming 109 note input 182 setting up 109, 182 stem direction 112 voices 112, 993 duplets.
Index dynamics (continued) spacing 645 staff-relative placement 343 subito 640 sustaining instruments 646 text 643 types 243, 628 ungrouping 648 unlinking 342, 650 velocity 437, 438, 633 voice-specific 245, 247, 429, 432, 637 volume 633 dynamics lanes 243, 429, 628 constant points 433 copying points 434 deleting points 436 editing 435 hiding 431 inputting points 432 linear points 433 moving points 435 showing 431 Dynamics panel 245, 247 E East Asian elision slurs 716 hiding 716 showing 716 Edit Chord Diag
Index endpoints (continued) saving 485 setup 482 voices 487 Engrave mode 363 engraving options percussion 990 enharmonic spelling accidentals 187, 200 chord symbols 606, 607 key signatures 698 MIDI 65, 204 modes 606 notes 187, 200 respelling 200 ensembles 81, 99 adding 83, 99, 121 brackets 55, 593, 594 divisi 916 groups 119, 121 staff grouping 55, 594 templates 55 envelopes dynamics 429, 435 equal division of the octave 700 equalization 471 equations tempo marks 231, 937 erased backgrounds bar numbers 564
Index expression maps 488, 489 actions 494, 503 conditions 495, 503 creating 502–504 dialog 489, 499 dynamics 496 endpoints 481, 484, 488 exporting 505 file format 488, 505 filters 489 hiding playing techniques 815 importing 505 MIDI 650 mutual exclusion groups 497, 502, 504 order 489 pitch 489, 502 playback techniques 489, 499, 503 playing techniques 512, 815 resetting 498 switches 492, 500, 503 transpose 490, 492, 496 trills 754 volume 650 Expression Maps dialog 489 expressive text.
Index files 59 different Dorico versions 57 exporting 59, 525, 527 importing 59 missing fonts 58 opening 56 videos 139 filled noteheads 719 films.
Index flows (continued) audio 73 cards 87 copying 59, 123 deleting 124 deleting empty bars 554 duplicating 123 duration 400 exporting 61 going to 346 headings.
Index frame rates 141 changing 137, 142 dialog 137 drop frame timecodes 849 non-drop frame timecodes 849 transport window 472, 473 frames 365, 404 breaks 367, 387 dashed 364 flow headings 364, 379, 380 hiding 345 music 381 padding 367 running headers 380 staves 372, 382 systems 372, 382, 386 text 397 tokens 397 frequency auto-save 78 bar numbers 563 bar repeat counts 865 harmonics 733 slash region counts 876 timecodes 851 trills 745 frets 104 adding 116, 184, 614 brackets.
Index glissando lines (continued) harp pedaling 766, 794 hiding 765 inputting 266, 268, 274, 275, 764 line styles 764 panel 270, 275 placement 763 playback 766, 794 popover 268, 274 position 763 showing 765 styles 764 text 765 tie chains 766 types 268 global chord symbols 253, 598 figured bass 313, 651 properties 147, 149, 395 glyphs accidentals 200 fonts 396 pedal lines 808 playing techniques 813 trills 741, 742 go to.
Index graphics files (continued) image resolution 536 monochrome 536 green notes tablature 919 grids chord diagrams 610 gaps 115 instrument groups 112 naming groups 113 percussion kits 983, 984 rhythmic 155, 156 staff labels 903 staves 907, 983 groups bar repeats 867 beams. See beam groups braces 592 brackets 592 dynamics 647, 648 guitar bends 768 instruments. See instrument groups notes. See note grouping percussion kits 109, 112–114 players. See player groups playing techniques 818, 819, 821 rests.
Index half-step trills (continued) position 753 showing 745, 749 half-steps 11, 541 accidentals 185, 541 bend intervals 774, 782 figured bass 316 glissando lines 763 harp pedaling 794 pitch bend 439 string pitches 116 tonality systems 700 trills. See half-step trills HALion Sonic SE endpoints 487 independent voice playback 460 playback template 473, 474 HALion Symphonic Orchestra endpoints 487 independent voice playback 460 playback template 473, 474 halving.
Index hiding (continued) dynamics lanes 431 East Asian elision slurs 716 empty staves 373 figured bass 315, 652, 653, 655 fingering slides 670 fingerings 664 flared hairpins 644 flow headings 379 flow page numbers 380 flow titles 380 flows 126, 389 Flows panel 87 glissando line text 765 guitar bend hold lines 775 guitar pre-bend accidentals 777 harmonics 734 harp pedaling 796, 797, 799 highlights 345 hold lines 654, 655, 775 hyphens 634 initial page numbers 792 instrument change labels 906 instrument chang
Index horizontal position (continued) notes 406, 998, 999 ornaments 742 poco a poco 640 rehearsal marks 839 rests 879 staves 382 string indicators 678 systems 382 tempo marks 929 text 404 ties 939 time signatures 950 trills 742 tuplet brackets 974 tuplets 967, 976 horns branch indicators 671 clefs 83, 620 fingerings 670 key signatures 83 hotkeys.
Index inputting (continued) caret 157, 160 centered beams 582 chord diagram shapes 613 chord symbols 249, 252, 253, 256 chords 144, 192 clefs 256–259 comments 357, 360 dips 286 dives 280–283 dynamic modifiers 243, 245, 247, 639 dynamics 243, 245, 247, 432, 639 ensembles 83, 99 expression maps 502–504 fermatas 262–264 figured bass 313, 315 figured bass hold lines 313, 315, 654 fingerings 212 flows 122 frame breaks 387 glissando lines 266, 268, 274, 275, 764 grace notes 190 gradual tempo changes 229, 231, 23
Index Insert mode (continued) inputting notes 178 time signatures 224–227, 949 tuplets 972 insertion point 157 inserts 471 instances adding 417 plug-ins 415 instrument change labels 100, 906 hiding 906 showing 906 instrument changes 102 allowing 102 disallowing 102 inputting 105, 161, 165 labels 103, 906 language 103, 131, 132 instrument groups 112, 119 deleting 114 naming 113 percussion kits 112 instrument labels percussion kits 113 instrument names 129, 901 alignment 132 changing 131 Endpoint Setup dialo
Index instruments (continued) staff labels 132, 902, 905 staff size 383 staves 42, 374, 375, 637, 910, 983 strings 104 sustaining 646 swing playback 467 tablature 917, 918 templates 55 tracks. See instrument tracks transposing 104, 127. See also instrument transpositions tuning 83, 104 velocity 437.
Index key commands (continued) defining 45 finding 49 galley view 42 keyboard layouts 51 languages 51 maps 48 MIDI 50 mouse input 144 muting 461, 462 navigation 30, 346, 347 notehead sets 723 page view 42 playback 458 removing 51 resetting 51 searching 48, 49 soloing 461, 462 text formatting 308 key signatures 693 accidentals 541, 693 atonal 694 barlines 696 cautionary 699 changes 693, 696 changing 342 clefs 696 custom 700 deleting 695 enharmonic equivalent 698 filter 340 hiding 83, 216, 218, 219, 694, 695
Index layouts 21, 85, 93, 124, 392 accidentals 200 adding flows 126 adding players 125 bar numbers 563, 565, 566 blank staves 375 braces 55, 593, 594, 596. See also staff grouping brackets 55, 593, 594, 596. See also staff grouping cards. See layout cards casting off 385 chord symbols 601 clefs 619, 620 color mode 527 comparing 40 concert pitch 127 condensing 392 copies 522 copying formatting 393, 394 copying properties 395 creating 125 cues.
Index left-hand fingering (continued) placement 661 popover 215 position 668 pull-offs. See hammer-ons size 665 slides 669, 670 tapping. See tapping left-hand guitar tapping. See tapping legato note durations 170 playing technique. See playing techniques. See also playback techniques legends percussion.
Index lines (continued) string shift indicators 672 system breaks 825 system dividers. See system dividers tablature 917 tempo marks 447, 937 text 404, 825, 835–838 ties 941, 942 trills 745, 746 tuplet brackets. See tuplet brackets types 823, 826 velocity 438 vertical 823, 826 vertical position 826, 828 vibrato bar.
Index margins (continued) MusicXML files 63 pages 367, 369 staves 381 tacets 392 mark-up. See comments. See also annotations markers 844 comments. See comments deleting 350 dialog 318 filter 340 hiding 844 important 320, 847 inputting 318, 454 moving 846, 847 panel 319 repeats 322, 857 showing 844 staff 845 staff spacing 371, 408 text 318, 319, 846 timecodes 318, 846 track 454 vertical position 371, 408, 845 marks rehearsal. See rehearsal marks tempo.
Index MIDI (continued) note input 157, 177, 187 note range 100 order 494 overlapping notes 170 pan 469 percussion maps 488, 506, 509 piano roll editor 420 pitch bend 439 playback 427, 481, 506 ports 482 quantization 68 range 100 recording.
Index molto centered 640 dynamics 243, 245, 639, 640 tempo marks 228, 229, 231 monochrome graphics 536 moon noteheads 722, 723 mordents 741 intervals 741 mosso. See tempo marks motors. See playing techniques mouse input 153 activating 144, 169 deactivating 144, 169 settings 154, 155 movements 17, 122 adding 122 exporting 61 flow headings 364 importing 59, 60 multiple on pages 377 splitting 355 tacets 389 movies.
Index music arranging. See arranging condensing. See condensing editing 153 music area 28 event display. See event display making selections 336 moving music 346–348 multiple windows 41 opening layouts 27, 36 page arrangements 35 panels 37 selecting views 42 zoom options 35, 348 Music Fonts dialog 396 music frame chains 366 propagating part formatting 393, 394 music frames 365 frame chains. See music frame chains margins 381 padding 381 vertical justification 408 music symbols tokens 399 musical extracts.
Index notations appearance 147 changing 342 copying 351, 352 editing 147 inputting 18, 209 percussion kits 981 popovers 18 position 147 properties 147 selecting 334, 335 settings 90 zoom options 35, 348 Notations panel 143, 153 Notations toolbox 151 notches pedal lines. See pedal retakes slurs 891 ties 941 note and rest colors 727, 882 exporting 525, 537 hiding 345, 727, 997 notes out of range 727, 917 printing 522, 537 rests 882 tablature 917 voices 997 note brackets.
Index noteheads (continued) slashes 722, 869, 1001 square 722 time signatures 957 triangular 721 types 719 unpitched percussion 985, 987 walker 722 wedges 721 notes 19, 718 accidentals 146, 185 add intervals popover 198 adding to existing notes 197 alignment 630 appearance 147 arpeggio signs. See arpeggio signs articulations 146, 547, 549, 550 auditioning 341, 342 auxiliary 752 beaming 575, 577 brackets.
Index notes (continued) transposing 198, 199, 201–203, 424, 697 tremolos. See tremolos trill intervals 749, 750 trills 744 tuplets 967, 969 types 146 unbeaming 578 undamped 946 unscaling 969 velocity 437. See also velocity lanes voices 174, 353, 354 Notes panel 143, 146 showing more note durations 146 Notes toolbox 144 scissors 947 November music font 396 numbers backups 78 bar repeats 864, 865 bars 563, 570 beam lines 587 figured bass.
Index orchestral cues. See cues order 97, 98, 107, 119, 128 staff grouping 55, 594 templates 55 orchestrating.
Index page numbers 791 count 401 flow headings 380, 792 flows 400 hiding 380, 792 initial 377, 792 numeral style 791 showing 380 tokens 400, 401 total 401 page ranges exporting 524 printing 524 selecting 530 page size 533, 534 changing 368 layout options 90 MusicXML files 63 page turns first page on the left 377 page view 34 arrangements 35 changing to 42 flows 355 pages arrangements 35 background color 44 breaks.
Index part formatting 393, 394 system formatting 393 part layouts. See layouts part names 129 changing 131 partial beams 578 partial harp pedaling 799 hiding 799 showing 799 partials 733 changing 735 parts. See layouts pasting. See copying patches endpoints 481 playback 481, 488, 506 path export 61, 63, 69, 72, 73, 527 patterns chord diagrams 608, 612–614 pauses 687 appearance 342 barlines 692 breath marks. See breath marks caesuras.
Index percussion kits (continued) legends 990 moving notes 981 naming 109, 113 notations 981 note input 182, 183, 421 noteheads 985, 987 playing techniques 985, 988 presentation types 109, 978, 983, 984 removing instruments 115 rhythm slashes 1003 setting up 109, 182 single-line instruments 983 spacing 115 staff labels 109, 903, 907, 983 staff position 114, 182, 985 staff-relative legend placement 343 staves 109, 978, 983, 984 stem direction 109, 183, 993, 994 stickings 982 voices 109, 993, 994 percussion
Index pitch (continued) strings 116, 118, 613, 614 transposed 104, 127 trills 748–750, 753, 754, 756 pitch before duration 165 accidentals 168 activating 144 articulations 168 rhythm dots 168 pitch bends 441, 763, 768 guitar. See guitar bends MIDI controllers 439, 441 più. See tempo marks. See also dynamic modifiers pizzicato.
Index playback (continued) playing techniques 460, 503, 512, 513 playthroughs 464 plug-ins 469 preferences 45 recording notes 206 repeats 464, 465 resetting volume 462 rewinding 457 selections 458 silence playback template 473, 474 slashes 353, 872, 1001 slurs 211, 460, 900 soloing 461, 462 starting 458 swing 466–468 templates.
Index players (continued) showing 123, 125 solo players 81, 94, 95 soloing 461, 462 staff labels 902 staff size 383 staves 374, 375 swing playback 467, 468 tablature 917, 918 text tokens 397 transposition 104 Players panel 80, 81 hiding 81 showing 81 playhead 457 fast-forwarding 457 hiding 458 moving 347, 457 playback 458 position 458 repeats 464 rewinding 457 showing 458 transport 472, 473 zooming 426 Playing Technique Combinations dialog 499 playing technique lines 818, 821 appearance 820 changing 822 de
Index PNG files (continued) layout numbers 128 layouts 525, 527 resolution 536 poco a poco centered 640 dynamics 243, 245, 639, 640, 644 tempo marks 927, 929 points automation 439, 441–444 constant 433, 442 dynamics 429, 432, 433, 435, 436 linear 433, 442 tempo changes 447 unit of measurement 45 polychord chord symbols 251, 598 inputting 255 polymeter 224, 225, 949 polytonality 218, 219, 693 popovers 18 add intervals 197, 198, 201 arpeggio signs 268, 273 bar repeats 324, 333 barlines 235, 237, 238, 240, 24
Index primary bar number sequence changing 571 returning to 573 primary beams 586 Print mode 16, 518 landscape orientation 530 page setup 534 panels 31, 518–520 portrait orientation 530 printers 530 switching 518 toolboxes 518 Print Options panel 518, 520 print preview area 30 navigation 30, 518 printers 530 selecting 522 printing 518, 522 annotations 537 arrangements 530 booklets 532 borders 537 comments 361, 537 copies 522 crop marks 537 date 537 duplex 522, 532 job types 530 key commands 47 landscape 53
Index quantization changing 206 dialog 68 importing MIDI 65 MIDI recording 204 requantizing 206 tuplets 68 quarter notes 11, 146 beats 236 metronome marks 230 swing playback 466 tempo equations 937 tuplets 197 quarter tones 545, 700 accidentals 545 guitar bends 281, 772, 774 transposing 198 quartet templates 55 staff grouping 55, 594 quavers. See eighth notes question marks harmonics 734 tablature 199, 917 quintet templates 55 staff grouping 55, 594 quintuplets. See tuplets R rallentando.
Index renaming (continued) player groups 120 players 130 titles 135 renumbering layouts 128 repeat barlines 558 exporting 464 inputting 237, 240, 242 MIDI recording 206 number of times played 464 playback 464 playthroughs 464 popover 237, 240, 242 repeat endings 853 additional endings 326, 327 alignment 855 appearance 856 bar numbers 573 deleting 350 exporting 464 final segments 856 handles 854 inputting 322, 325–327 length 854 MIDI recording 206 moving 855 multiple positions 855, 913 MusicXML files 856 nu
Index resolution changing 527 images 536 rhythmic grid 32, 156 respelling accidentals 200 chord symbols 606, 607 notes 200 rest grouping. See note grouping restating accidentals 545 restorative text 811 restoring. See resetting. See also hiding rests 19, 879 alignment 879 bar rests. See bar rests beaming 577, 588 changing type 882 colors 882.
Index right-hand fingering (continued) popover 215 tapping. See tapping right-hand guitar tapping. See tapping rim shots. See playing techniques. See also playing technique-specific noteheads rips. See jazz articulations ritardando. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks ritenuto. See gradual tempo changes. See also tempo marks rolled chords. See arpeggio signs rolls.
Index section players (continued) staff labels 901 staves 374, 375 sections coda 857 fine 857 hiding 35 repeat 857 showing 35 segments caps 834 final 856 repeat endings 326, 327, 854 tuplets 970 segno 857 inputting 329 multiple 858 sections 857 selecting 33, 334, 336, 341, 345 bars 337, 338 beats 339 blue 648, 899 changing the selection.
Index signatures annotations 537 key signatures. See key signatures printing 537 time signatures.
Index slash voices (continued) multiple-voice contexts 871 percussion kits 109, 180, 1003 playback 1001 popover 324 regions 324, 869 staff position 872 stem direction 924 stemless 157, 175 vertical position 872 slashes 869 dynamics 634 figured bass 315 grace notes 682, 683, 685, 686 noteheads 719, 722, 869, 1001 notes. See slash voices. See also tremolo strokes regions. See slash regions stemless 1002 stems. See tremolo strokes time signatures 956, 958 tremolos. See tremolo strokes voices.
Index sounding pitch 127, 733 harmonics 737 input pitch 167 layouts 127 sounds. See playback soundtracks audio 141 volume 141 source instruments 627 source notes 669 space size 370, 382, 383 spacing accidentals 544 arpeggio signs 760 caesuras 265 condensing 392 cross-staff beams 584 cues 406 frets 116 galley view 34 grace notes 406 gradual dynamics 645 layout options 90 lyrics 407, 710, 711 notes.
Index staff size (continued) MusicXML files 63 rastral size 382 space size 382 staff spacing 370, 408 changing 371, 408 condensing 392 default settings 371, 408 divisi 372 galley view 408, 410 hiding staves 373–375 justification 372, 408 layout options 90 rehearsal marks 839 staff text 397 alignment 404 formatting 308, 310 hiding 405 inputting 307 moving 404 showing 405 signposts 349 staff-relative placement articulations 550 bar numbers 569 beaming 578, 579 changing 343 cue labels 343 dynamics 343, 629 fi
Index staves (continued) key signatures 218, 219, 693 labels. See staff labels large time signatures 955 layout options 909 margins 381 markers 845 moving 371, 381 multiple voices 174, 392 notation 917, 918 note input 161, 177 notes 353 number 373, 375, 910, 911 order 97, 98 ossia staves. See ossia staves page view 42 pauses 689 percussion 983, 984 pick-up bars. See pick-up bars playback 458 rasterizing.
Index string indicators (continued) moving 677, 678 outside staff 301, 302, 674 panel 294, 302 placement 677 popover 291, 294, 301 position 677 string instruments 100, 104 fingering shifts 671 playing techniques. See playing techniques specifying string 726 substitution fingering 661 string pitches changing 118 fretted instruments 118 string shift indicators 671 angles 671 direction 672, 726 thickness 671 strings adding 116 bends.
Index switching flows 346, 347 layouts 24, 36 notes to percussion instruments 981 tabs 39 syllables dynamics 643 lyrics 704 position 710 tempo marks 936 types 705 symbols bar repeats 861, 867 bar rests 886 caret 157 chords. See chord symbols. See also chord diagrams ornaments 741 pedal lines 808 playing techniques 813 speech bubbles. See comments vibrato bar 778 symphony.
Index tablature (continued) bends. See guitar bends bracketed noteheads 728, 729, 768, 773 caret 157 changing string for notes 919 chords 165, 184 clefs 616 dead notes 782 default notation 161, 165 dives 773 frets 116 green notes 917, 919 guitar bends 768, 918 harmonics 734, 737 hiding 918 hold lines 768, 775 intervals 774 note input 165, 184 notes out of range 199, 727, 917, 919 open pitches 118 parenthesized fret numbers 768, 773 post-bends. See guitar post-bends pre-bends.
Index tempo marks (continued) formatting 936, 937 gradual tempo changes 231, 927, 934, 935 handles 935 hiding 932 hyphens 936 inputting 228, 231, 233, 234 integers 233, 234 length 935 metronome marks.
Index ties (continued) articulations 550, 551, 938 bracketed noteheads 730 breaking 947 cautionary accidentals 542, 736 chains.
Index time track (continued) inputting tempo changes 449 moving tempo changes 450 timecodes 849 changing 137, 846, 850 dialog 137 drop frame 849 flows 87 frequency 851 inputting 318 markers 318–320 non-drop frame 849 offset 850 panel 319 staff 845, 850 staff spacing 371, 408 start values 850 tempo 320 transport window 472, 473 vertical position 850 times played changing 464 timpani key signatures 83 rolls.
Index transposed pitch 127 chord symbols 127, 606, 607 clefs 619, 620 input pitch 167 instrument transpositions 904 layouts 127 note input 167 part layouts 124, 127 showing 127 staff labels 901, 904 status display 32 viewing 127 transposing 203 accidentals 203 chord symbols 127, 202, 203, 599 clefs 83, 621 dialog 203 expression maps 488, 490, 492, 496 figured bass 201, 202 instruments.
Index triplets 967 inputting 144, 194, 195 swing playback 466 troppo. See tempo marks tucking index changing 827 lines 827 tuning changing 83, 116, 118 chord diagrams 610, 612, 613 custom 116, 118, 119, 609, 610 dialog 116 exporting 119 fretted instruments 83, 104, 116 guitar 83, 104, 116 importing 118 open pitches 118 strings 118 systems.
Index U ukulele. See fretted instruments una corda pedal 801 appearance 811 MIDI controller 812 text 811 unassigned instruments loading sounds 479 uncompressed MusicXML 63, 64 undamped. See playing techniques. See also laissez vibrer ties underlines text 308 ungrouping dynamics 648 playing techniques 822 unisons 916 altered.
Index versions files 57 vertical alignment dynamics 647, 648 lines 821 playing techniques 821 vertical justification staves 372, 408 systems 372, 408 vertical lines. See lines.
Index view options (continued) percussion legends 990 playhead 458, 473 print preview 345, 518 printing 537 rests 882 signposts 350 slash regions 870 system break signposts 389 system track 338 tabs 27, 36, 38 time signature signposts 960 timecode 473 tracks 426, 455 transport 473 types 34 video window 140 voices 997 windows 41 zoom 35, 348, 426 vivace. See tempo marks vocal scores.
Index watermarks 537 exporting 525 printing 522 WAV files exporting 73, 74 wavy lines. See wiggly lines. See also lines wedge lines 305, 823 hiding 820 inputting 305 showing 819, 820, 833 wedge noteheads 721, 723 weight time signatures 961 Western tonality key signatures 693 octave divisions 700 whammy bar.
